JP2015062632A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance interest in a game by increasing a desire to participate in a performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes control means (a game control device 100, a performance control device 300) for executing a game on the basis of satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and can generate a special game state for granting game value to a player when the game results become a predetermined result. The game machine also includes voice recognition means (a voice recognition unit 80) for recognizing contents of voice uttered by a player and generating voice recognition information (a voice recognition command) including content information (input line number) relating to the recognized contents. The control means can execute a reply performance corresponding to the content information, on the basis of the voice recognition information.

Description

  The present invention comprises a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for performing progress control of the variable display game executed based on establishment of a start condition, The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a result mode of a variable display game has a predetermined special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player and that allows the player to perform technical intervention (can participate) in the production by operating the operation unit. Specifically, a gaming machine or the like that changes the content of the effect in accordance with the push button operation by the player is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-183186 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to participate in the production only within a range of predetermined options such as pressing / not pressing the push button at a predetermined timing. Therefore, there is a problem that the willingness to participate in the production is difficult to increase.

  An object of the present invention is to increase the willingness to participate in the production and improve the interest of the game in the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
Control means for executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the result of the game is a predetermined result,
A voice recognition means capable of recognizing the content of the voice uttered by the player and generating voice recognition information including content information related to the recognized content;
The control means includes
A reply effect corresponding to the content information can be executed based on the voice recognition information.

  According to the invention described in claim 1, since it is possible to perform a response effect corresponding to the content of the voice uttered by the player, that is, an effect that makes the gaming machine feel familiar, the motivation to participate in the effect is increased, The interest of the game can be improved.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The control means includes
The reply effect is executed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine and the voice recognition information.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, since a response effect suitable for the gaming state of the gaming machine can be executed, the friendliness of the gaming machine can be given more.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The voice recognition means
Recognizing the language type of the voice uttered by the player, it is possible to generate information including language type information related to the recognized language type as the voice recognition information,
The control means includes
As the response effect, an effect corresponding to content information and language type information included in the voice recognition information is executed.
According to the third aspect of the present invention, the response effect corresponding to the language type used by the player can be executed, so that the friendliness of the gaming machine can be further increased.

The invention according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3,
The control means includes
If the voice recognition means could not recognize the language type of the voice, the response information was generated before the voice recognition information and the content information regarding the voice content included in the voice recognition information as the reply effect. An effect corresponding to the language type information included in the speech recognition information is executed.
According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, when the voice recognition means cannot recognize the language type, the player can execute an effect corresponding to the language type used before, so that More friendliness can be given.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the production and improve the interest of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process which a game control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart explaining the main process which a game control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process which a game control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining command transmission processing. It is a flowchart explaining a production control command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a production control command output process. It is a flowchart explaining command data output processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining an error check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. 5 is a flowchart for explaining count switch monitoring processing 1; 10 is a flowchart for explaining count switch monitoring processing 2; It is a flowchart explaining a count update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a stop symbol information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a latter half fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a process shift setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flow chart explaining processing 2 shift setting processing during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening operation transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening operation transition setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 4. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process 2 shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process 2 in small hits. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit | end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process transfer setting process during a normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end processing shift setting process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a timing chart explaining the lighting timing of right-handed notification LED. It is a flowchart explaining the main process which an effect control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart explaining a voice recognition command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a voice recognition command analysis process. It is a figure which shows an example of an input speech number and a language classification table. It is a figure which shows an example of an output serif number and language classification table. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of a player speech content (input speech number) and a response speech content (output speech number). It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of a player speech content (input speech number) and a response speech content (output speech number). It is a figure which shows an example of the flow after performing an effect production with respect to the said sound after a sound is captured by the microphone. It is a figure for demonstrating the output of a response audio | voice and the display of the image corresponding to the said response audio | voice. It is a figure which shows the modification of a microphone. It is a flowchart explaining a touch detection sensor input interruption process. It is a timing chart explaining how to confirm the operation for the tactile sense operation unit. It is a flowchart explaining a tactile sense operation monitoring process. It is a figure which shows an example of a growth point addition value table. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the first half change. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the latter half change. It is a front view of the front frame and glass frame with which the gaming machine of the second embodiment is provided. It is a front view of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of a game ball rolling channel | path. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of a game ball rolling channel | path. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of a game ball rolling channel | path. It is a figure which shows the modification 3 of a game ball rolling channel | path. It is a figure which shows the modification 4 of a game ball rolling channel | path. It is a timing chart explaining the operation timing of a frame accessory, and the switching timing of a flow-path switching member. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 1 of a frame accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 2 of a frame accessory. It is a front view which shows the modification of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 145 is a diagram for describing a configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIGS. 143 and 144. 145 is a timing chart for explaining the operation timings of the frame accessory and the rendering accessory in the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 143 and 144.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support body) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15. On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.
Further, the glass frame 15 (or the front frame 12) is provided with a voice recognition unit 80 and a microphone 80a that collects a player's voice and outputs it to the voice recognition unit 80. That is, the voice recognition function can be used even when the outer frame 11 is replaced.
In the present embodiment, since the hinge 13 serving as the rotation axis of the front frame 12 is provided on the left side, the right frame decoration device serving as the open end that hardly obstructs rotation even when the shape protrudes forward. The microphone 80a may be attached to the left frame decoration device 18 of the left and right frame decoration devices 18, or the right frame decoration device 18 and the left frame decoration device 18 may be attached. It may be attached to both.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 and an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher are shown. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 that stores game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Furthermore, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, a production button 25a (see FIG. 4) capable of detecting a pressing operation by the player and a 1 to 3D operation by the player are detected. There is provided a tactile operation unit 90 incorporating a possible tactile detection sensor 90a (see FIG. 4). Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the game ball 32 supplied from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device is used as a game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30 (FIG. 2). Fire towards (see). Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). it can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (common symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In the game area 32, three general winning ports 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the normal figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, A start winning area) is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that are open at the top in a reverse “C” shape and can be converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow in, and the pair of movable members 37b and 37b. Holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot normally flow. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is awarded. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). Note that it is possible to allow a game ball to be won even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the game ball is less likely to win than in the open state. Further, the movable member is not a pair but may be configured to be converted into an open state in which the game ball can easily flow into the normal variation prize winning device 37 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a single movable member.

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the start winning opening 36, a game ball can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. One special variable winning device (first big prize opening, lower big prize opening) 38 is arranged.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side. The winning opening is closed (blocked state unfavorable for the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, for example. During the winning game state, the game winning hole is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of the gaming ball into the winning line and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. It is like that. Note that a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) serving as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is arranged inside the first special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 (winning area). It is installed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of lower count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball flowing into the big winning opening is detected by any of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  Further, in the upper right part of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device (second big prize opening, upper big prize winning) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39) is provided.

The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right side. The state is changed from a state where the mouth is closed (a closed state unfavorable to the player) to an opened state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 39c that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the winning game state, the game winning hole is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of the gaming ball into the winning line and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. It is like that. In addition, an upper count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) serving as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is arranged inside the second special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 39 (winning area). It is installed.
Which timing of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is to be released in the special game state is determined by the type of result mode (special result) of the special figure variation display game.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game in the game area 32 where the game balls flow down. It is an area. Then, the player can aim to win the start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim for winning in the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and various information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of open / close operations of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode turned on.

The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change.
In addition, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 53 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holdings is “3”, only the lamp 3 is turned on. When the number of hold is “4”, all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

The special figure 1 holding display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, by a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off, flashing, or turning on.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.
In the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the starting memory number is displayed in the same lighting manner as the general figure hold indicator 56.

The first game state display unit 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in a normal game state, the lamp is turned off, and when a big hit has occurred, the lamp is turned on.
The second game state display unit 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and for example, the lamp is turned off in the normal gaming state, and the lamp is turned on when the short-time state is generated.

  The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off. If the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state (probability variation state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when the game is not in a special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed during the special game state. Turn on the light. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

Further, the collective display device 50 according to the present embodiment includes a right-handed notification unit that notifies that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game.
This right-handed notification section is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when a left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a right-handed player, the lamp is turned off, and a right-handed person is left-handed. When the game state is advantageous to the player, the lamp is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are awarded, or flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port (the number of payouts) is increased. From the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 3), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23. That is, the payout unit is a payout device that can pay out game media.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual map variable display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a variable display unit (common map display) 53 constituted by LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are normal. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the normal figure change display game is the normal figure specifying result, the normal figure is hit and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode. Further, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is the small hit result mode, the small hit game state (so-called small hit state) is set. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the starting memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball wins at the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) in a state that is not, a special game state or a small hit game state, if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half variation pattern as a pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A10) in a special figure game process described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., any one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation pattern tables Select and get a table. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from a fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a fraud radio wave signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Is also entered. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command. It is. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124. Further, the number of inputs of the magnetic sensor 61 is one for the game control device 100, but actually, a plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, four) are mounted, and the relay board (sensor and game control device 100 Wired-or connection above.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 Is input and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 to transmit data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine cannot control the game. An error signal indicating the state is supplied from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of 39b and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 A fourth driver 138d for output is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 manages a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, an FeRAM 323 that stores various data, and a date and time. An RTC (Real Time Clock) 328 is connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors Process such as drive control and production time management. The main control microcomputer 311 is connected to a voice recognition unit 80 for recognizing voice collected by a microphone 80 a provided on the glass frame 15.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates the moving light 16) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a tactile detection sensor 90 a built in the tactile operation unit 90 provided on the glass frame 15, A function of detecting an on / off state of a production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311; A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided. Note that the switch input circuit 336 also has a function of detecting the on / off state of the effect agent switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. good.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V for powering the command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving the LED and the speaker is generated. Yes. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312, a tone generator LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control a lamp and a motor, and an amplifier circuit 337 that drives a speaker. To reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display device, a process for displaying the universal symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. The start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37. A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state (production mode) is set, the sound is output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs is performed. . That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b or the second special fluctuation by the big prize opening solenoid 39b. The opening / closing member 39c of the winning device 39 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) in the normal operation state (high normal probability) State).

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. This main process is started when the power is turned on.
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 5, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step S1) for prohibiting an interrupt is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2), a stack pointer setting process (Step S3) for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt mode setting process for setting an interrupt processing mode ( Step S4) is performed.

Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control device (payout board) 200 to start up normally, a waiting time of, for example, 4 milliseconds is performed (step S5). As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, thereby avoiding the payout control device 200 from losing the command. be able to.
Next, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S6), and OFF data is output to all output ports (all output ports are set to have no output) ( Step S7).
Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) is set (step S8).

Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is ON (step S9).
If it is determined in step S9 that the initialization switch is not ON (step S9; No), the power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, “5Ah”) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal. Is checked (step S10), and it is determined whether or not it is normal (step S11).
When it is determined in step S11 that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (step S11; Yes), the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal. It is checked whether it is data 2 (for example, “A5h”) (step S12), and it is determined whether it is normal (step S13).
When it is determined in step S13 that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (step S13; Yes), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM ( Step S14) is performed, and the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is turned off (when the power is turned off) (step S15), and it is determined whether or not they match (step S16).
If it is determined in step S16 that the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power failure (step S16; Yes), the process proceeds to step S17 in FIG. Do.

  Further, when it is determined in step S9 that the initialization switch is ON (step S9; Yes), it is determined in step S11 or step S13 that the value of the power failure inspection region is not normal power failure inspection region check data. In the case (step S11; No or step S13; No), if it is determined in step S16 that the calculated checksum does not match the checksum when the power is turned off (step S16; No), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. Move to the initialization process.

  In step S17 of FIG. 6, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared (step S17), and then the checksum area is cleared (step S18), and the areas related to errors and fraud monitoring are reset (step S19). In this embodiment, in step S19, an error scan counter area, a security signal control timer area, a front frame (glass frame 15) release monitoring area, a game frame (front frame 12) release monitoring area, a shot ball break monitoring area, an overflow Monitoring area, payout abnormality monitoring area, switch abnormality monitoring area, prize winning dishonest prize monitoring area, general electric power illegal prize winning monitoring area, magnetic monitoring area, special prize fraud monitoring information area 1, general electric fraud monitoring information area, external information Reset the security signal / door / frame open signal area in the area, the gaming machine error status signal area, etc. in the test signal area.

Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20).
If it is determined in step S20 that the state is not a high probability state (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20 that the state is a high probability state (step S20; Yes), ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S21), and is provided in, for example, the collective display device 50. The ON (lighting) data of the high probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59) is saved in the segment area (step S22), and the process proceeds to step S23.
In step S23, a command at the time of power restoration corresponding to a special figure game process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later (for example, a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command, The decorative special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, recovery screen command (or customer waiting demo command)) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S23), and the process proceeds to step S29.

When jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S24), and then all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Then, the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26). In the present embodiment, in step S26, the customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo area, or the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery.
Next, an output timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) of external information (security signal) relating to RWM clear is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S27), and a command at power-on (for example, model designation command, power-on) Command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is activated (step S29).
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Next, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Next, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the hit of special figure (big hit random number), big hit symbol Is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2) and a random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of a normal figure (step S31), interrupt Is permitted (step S32). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the generated random numbers and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Next, initial value random number update processing (step S33) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2, hit random number) use random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. It is configured. Each random number is a relatively low-speed counter (referred to as a soft random number) that is updated based on a CTC for random number update. In addition, the generation cycle of the random number update CTC is the same as the timer interrupt processing cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main control program.

Next, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S34), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON. Determination is made (step S35).
If it is determined in step S35 that the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S35; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process of step S33 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid executing the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the interrupt process is not performed, but only within the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process There is an advantage of being.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S35 that the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S34 ( Step S36).
If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S36; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is in the ON state for the number of checks (step S36; Yes), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, interruption is temporarily prohibited. Then, OFF data is output to all the output ports (step S38).

Next, the power failure inspection region check data 1 (for example, “5Ah”) is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S39), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, “A5h”) is saved in the power failure inspection region 2. (Step S40).
Next, a checksum calculation process (step S41) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is performed, the calculated checksum is saved (step S42), and access to the RWM is prohibited (step S43). Wait for the machine to shut down. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S14 and S41) in the main process described above will be described.
In the checksum calculation process, as shown in FIG. 7, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), and the number of repetitions (for example, the number of bytes in the RAM being used) is set. Then, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53).

Next, a value obtained by adding the content of the calculated address to the calculated value is set as a new calculated value (step S54), and the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55).
Next, the number of repetitions is updated by −1, it is checked whether the checksum calculation has been completed (step S56), and it is determined whether the calculation has been completed (step S57).
If it is determined in step S57 that the checksum calculation has not been completed (step S57: No), the process returns to step S54.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S57 that the checksum calculation has ended (step S57: Yes), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the above-described main process will be described.
In the initial value random number update process, as shown in FIG. 8, first, the big hit initial value random number (the random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the winning of the special figure variation game) is updated by +1 (step S61). In the present embodiment, in step S61, the big hit initial value random number is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “1192”.
Next, the winning initial value random number (the random value that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the winning of the usual variation game) is updated by +1 (step S62). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S62, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “250”.

Next, the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 (the random number that becomes the initial value of the random number for determining the big hit stop symbol in the special figure 1) is updated by +1 (step S63). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S63, the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “99”.
Next, the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 (the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number for determining the big hit stop symbol in the special figure 2) is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. In the present embodiment, in step S64, the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “99”.
In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuing to increment (+1 update) the random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. This timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

In the timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, input from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, usual gate switch 34a, count switches 38a and 39a, winning port switch 35a, etc.), that is, the state of each input port An input process (step S102) for reading is performed.
Next, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed.

Next, a command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like. )I do.
Next, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches 38a and 39a, and error monitoring ( A winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) is performed for performing the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 or the like.
Next, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor 61 and vibration. A magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) for checking the detection signal from the sensor switch to determine whether there is an abnormality, and an external information editing process (step S112) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer are performed.
Next, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S113), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S101 (step S114), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S115) are performed. Timer interrupt processing ends.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S102) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described.
In the input process, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the state of the signal taken into the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S201), and if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports. The state of the bit is cleared (step S202).
Next, the state of the input port 1 read in step S201 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S203).

Next, the parameters (for example, the input port address, the switch control area address, and unused bits (other than the bits to be monitored)) for reading the state of the signal fetched into the input port 2 (second input port 123) are cleared. (Mask data for) is prepared (step S204). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
Next, switch reading processing (step S205) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the switch reading process (step S205) in the above-described input process will be described.
In the switch reading process, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the state of the signal taken into the input port designated by the parameter prepared in step S204, that is, the input port 2 (second input port 123) is read. (First reading) is performed (step S211).
Next, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the bit is cleared (step S212), and the state of the input port 2 read in step S211 is changed to the port input state of the switch control area 2 in the RWM. 1 is saved (stored) (step S213).
Next, it waits for a delay time (for example, 0.1 msec) until the second reading to elapse (step S214).

When the delay time until the second reading elapses, the state of the signal taken into the input port 2 is read (second reading) (step S215).
Next, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S216), and the state of the input port 2 read in step S215 is changed to the port input state of the switch control area 2 in the RWM. 2 is saved (stored) (step S217).
Next, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first read and the second read is “1”, and a different bit is “0” (step S218). The logical product of 2 is taken and this time is used as a definite bit (step S219).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first reading and the second reading is “0”, and a different bit is “1” (step S220). The logical product with the finalized state at the time of interruption is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (step S221). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.
Next, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S222), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S223). ), The switch reading process is terminated.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not the change has occurred. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, output processing (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described.
In the output process, as shown in FIG. 12, first, OFF data is output to the segment output port (the third output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50) (step S301).
Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S302). In the present embodiment, in step S302, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “3”.
Next, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S303).

Next, a solenoid (general power solenoid 37c, large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b), a test terminal (relay board 70), and a digit output port (fourth output port 136 for outputting digit data of the collective display device (LED) 50) ) Are combined and output (step S304).
Next, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S305), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port (step S306).
Next, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is synthesized and output to the external information output port (fifth output port 137) (step S307).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (step S308). ).
Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (step S309). ).
Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (step S310). ).
Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (step S311). ).
Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (step). S312), the output process is terminated.

[Command transmission processing]
Next, the command transmission process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described.
In the command transmission process, as shown in FIG. 13, an effect control command transmission process (step S401) for the effect control apparatus 300 and a payout command transmission process (step S402) for the payout control apparatus 200 are performed, and the command transmission process ends. To do.

[Direction control command transmission processing]
Next, the effect control command transmission process (step S401) in the command transmission process described above will be described.
In the effect control command transmission process, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the value of the light counter that is “+1” when the transmission command is set to RWM, and “+1” when the transmission command is read from the RWM. The read counter value is compared to check whether the command is set (step S411), and it is determined whether the command is set (step S412). Specifically, when the write counter value matches the read counter value, it is determined that the command is not set, and when the write counter value does not match the read counter value, It is determined that a transmission command is set.

If it is determined in step S412 that no command is set (step S412; No), the effect control command transmission process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S412 that the command is set (step S412; Yes), the read counter is updated (step S413). In the present embodiment, in step S413, the value of the read counter is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “31”.
Next, a command is loaded from the command transmission area (MODE (upper byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S414), and the transmission area containing the loaded command is reset (step S415).
Next, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (ACTION (lower byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S416), and the transmission area containing the loaded command is reset (step S417).
Next, an effect control command output process (step S418) is performed, and the effect control command transmission process ends.

[Direction control command output processing]
Next, the effect control command output process (step S418) in the aforementioned effect control command transmission process will be described.
In the effect control command output process, as shown in FIG. 15, first, an OFF time (for example, 15 μsec) of a strobe signal indicating that an effect control command (MODE) is being output is prepared (step S421), and command data output is performed. Processing (step S422) is performed.
Next, an effect control command (ACTION) is output (step S423), a strobe signal OFF time (for example, 15 μsec) indicating that the effect control command (ACTION) is being output is prepared (step S424), and command data output processing ( Step S425) is performed, and the effect control command output process is terminated.

[Command data output processing]
Next, the command data output process (steps S422 and S425) in the above-described effect control command output process will be described.
In the command data output process, as shown in FIG. 16, first, port state holding data (for example, a strobe OFF state payout command (positive logic data)) is used so that the state immediately before the port is not lost. Load (step S431).

Next, an effect control command is output (step S432), a strobe signal in an OFF state (for example, a low level indicating invalidity of data reading) is output (step S433), and a period during which the strobe signal should be in an OFF state (strobe OFF period) ) Is determined (step S434).
If it is determined in step S434 that the strobe OFF period has not ended (step S434; No), that is, if the strobe OFF time prepared in step S421 or step S424 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S432. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S434 that the strobe OFF period has ended (step S434; Yes), that is, if the strobe OFF time prepared in step S421 or step S424 has elapsed, the strobe signal ON time ( For example, 35 μs) is set (step S435).

Next, an effect control command is output (step S436), a strobe signal in an ON state (for example, a high level indicating that data reading is valid) is output (step S437), and a period during which the strobe signal should be in an ON state (strobe ON) It is determined whether or not (period) has ended (step S438).
If it is determined in step S438 that the strobe ON period has not ended (step S438; No), that is, if the strobe ON time set in step S435 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S436.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S438 that the strobe ON period has ended (step S438; Yes), that is, if the strobe ON time set in step S435 has elapsed, an off-state strobe signal is output. (Step S439), the command data output process is terminated.

  The reason why the effect control command is output again in step S436 is to prevent the effect control command being output from being output after recovery from the power failure when a power failure occurs during the loop processing in steps S436 to S438. is there. It is also possible to avoid changing the command code due to noise. In addition, it is also possible to loop only each process in this step S434 and step S438.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S402) in the above-described command transmission process will be described.
In the payout command transmission process, as shown in FIG. 17, first, it is checked whether there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area provided for each winning opening (step S451). It is determined whether or not (step S452).

If it is determined in step S452 that there is no count number in the winning number counter area (step S452: No), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S453), and the total winning number counter area is updated. It is determined whether or not the count number check has been completed (step S454).
If it is determined in step S454 that the check of the number of all winning prize counter areas has been completed (step S454; Yes), the payout command transmission process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S454 that the check of the number of all winning prize counter areas has not been completed (step S454; No), the process returns to step S451.

If it is determined in step S452 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area (step S452; Yes), the value of the target winning number counter area is decremented by -1 (step S455), and the winning number counter area That is, a payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the winning opening address is acquired (step S456).
Next, an OFF time (for example, 15 μs) of the strobe signal indicating whether data reading is valid or invalid is set (step S457), the payout command (negative logic data) acquired in step S456 and the OFF state (low level). Is output (step S458), and it is determined whether or not the strobe OFF period has ended (step S459).

If it is determined in step S459 that the strobe OFF period has not ended (step S459; No), that is, if the strobe OFF time set in step S457 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S458.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S459 that the strobe OFF period has ended (step S459; Yes), that is, if the strobe OFF time set in step S457 has elapsed, the remaining output time of negative logic data (for example, , 30 μs) (step S460), a payout command (negative logic data) and an ON (high level) strobe signal are output (step S461), and it is determined whether or not the negative logic output period has ended. (Step S462).

If it is determined in step S462 that the negative logic output period has not ended (step S462; No), that is, if the remaining negative logic output time set in step S460 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S461. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S462 that the negative logic output period has ended (step S462; Yes), that is, if the negative logic output remaining time set in step S460 has elapsed, the negative logic payout command data. Is inverted to generate positive logic payout command data (step S463).

Subsequently, the remaining ON time (for example, 15 μs) of the strobe signal is set (step S464), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S463 and the ON state (high level) strobe signal are output. (Step S465), it is determined whether or not the strobe ON period has ended (step S466).
If it is determined in step S466 that the strobe ON period has not ended (step S466; No), that is, if the remaining strobe ON time set in step S464 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S465.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S466 that the strobe ON period has ended (step S466; Yes), that is, if the remaining strobe ON time set in step S464 has elapsed, the remaining output time of the positive logic data ( For example, 30 μs) is set (step S467).

Next, a payout command (positive logic data) and a strobe signal in an OFF state (low level) are output (step S468), and it is determined whether or not the positive logic output period has ended (step S469).
If it is determined in step S469 that the positive logic output period has not ended (step S469; No), that is, if the remaining positive logic output time set in step S467 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S468. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S469 that the positive logic output period has ended (step S469; Yes), that is, if the remaining positive logic output time set in step S467 has elapsed, a payout command (positive logic) Data) is saved in the port state holding data area of the RWM (step S470), and the command transmission process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 pays out the game ball based on this payout command. As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. By making a request to the game control apparatus 100, it becomes possible to receive an accurate command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot random number, the hit random number, the jackpot symbol random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.
In the random number update process 1, as shown in FIG. 18, first, a soft random number status indicating the update state of the random number is determined in order to determine whether there is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting after the random number goes around. The register value is checked (step S501), and it is determined whether there is a random number waiting for initial value setting (step S502).

If it is determined in step S502 that there is no random number waiting for initial value setting (step S502; No), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S502 that there is a random number waiting for initial value setting (step S502; Yes), it is checked whether the big hit random number in the special figure is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. (Step S503), it is determined whether or not waiting for initial value setting (step S504).
If it is determined in step S504 that the special jackpot random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S504; No), the process proceeds to step S507.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S504 that the big hit random number in the special figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S504; Yes), the big hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S505). The next initial value of the jackpot random number in the figure is set in the register holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S506), and the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is checked whether the usual random number is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S507), and it is determined whether or not the initial value setting is waiting (step S508).
If it is determined in step S508 that the usual hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S508; No), the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S508 that the usual hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S508; Yes), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S509) and loaded. The next initial value of the normal hit random number is set in the register holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S510), and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S511, it is checked whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S511), and it is determined whether or not waiting for the initial value setting is made (step S512).

If it is determined in step S512 that the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S512; No), the process proceeds to step S515.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S512 that the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S512; Yes), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S513) and loaded. The next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 1 is set in the register holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S514), and the process proceeds to step S515.
In step S515, it is checked whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 2 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S515), and it is determined whether or not waiting for the initial setting is made (step S516).

If it is determined in step S516 that the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S516; No), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S516; Yes), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S517) and loaded. The next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 2 is set in the register holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S518), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. This random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In the random number update process 2, as shown in FIG. 19, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is targeted for the current update process is updated. (Step S601). In this embodiment, in step S601, the random number update scan counter is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “3”.
Next, an effect random number update table address corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S602). In the present embodiment, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower order) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper order) is updated, and when it is “2”. The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated.

Next, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is loaded (step S603). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number.
Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S604). In the case of this embodiment, the mask value of the R register is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks) on the effect random number update table. Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, a value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as an added value (step S605), and a value obtained by adding the added value to the random value is set as a new random value (step S606). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the update area is defined on the effect random number update table for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).
Next, the new random number value is saved in the random number area (step S607), and the random number update process 2 is terminated.
In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG.

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described.
In the winning port switch / error monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 20, first, an illegal monitoring table (for example, a winning port switch (lower count switch 38a) in the large winning port 1 (first special variable winning device 38)). (Data indicating the number of the port to which the detection signal from the winning opening switch is input and the bit position of the signal in the port are stored) (step S701).
Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S702) is performed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening 1 even if the big winning opening 1 is not open, and to detect a normal winning.

Next, a fraud monitoring table for the winning port switch (upper count switch 39a) in the special winning port 2 (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step S703).
Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S704) is performed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening 2 even though the big winning opening 2 is not open, and to detect a normal winning.
Next, a fraud monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step S705).
Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S706) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning on the electric power even though the ordinary power is not open, and to detect a normal winning.
Next, a winning monitoring table for winning opening switches (start opening 1 switch 36a, winning opening switch 35a) that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S707), and a winning number counter updating process (step S708) is performed.

Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated and prepared (step S709). In the case of this embodiment, in step S709, the error scan counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0-3.
Next, a game machine error monitoring table 1 for monitoring an abnormality of the chute ball switch, overflow switch, and payout control device 200 from the payout control device 200 is prepared (step S710), and the switch and payout control device 200 are abnormal. An error check process (step S711) for determining whether or not the error has occurred is performed. In this embodiment, when the error scan counter value is “0”, a switch abnormality error (connector disconnection, disconnection, short circuit, etc.) is monitored, and when it is “1”, a shot ball break error is monitored. Sometimes an overflow error is monitored, and when “3”, a payout abnormality error is monitored.

Next, the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 for monitoring the opening of the glass frame 15 and the front frame 12 based on signals from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 is prepared (step S712).
Next, the error scan counter is loaded, converted into the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 for monitoring the opening of the glass frame 15 and the front frame 12, prepared (step S713), and no abnormality has occurred in these switches. An error check process (step S714) is performed to determine whether or not the winning prize switch / error monitoring process is terminated. In the case of this embodiment, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” or “2”, the opening of the front frame (glass frame 15) is monitored, and when it is “1” or “3”, the game frame (front frame 12) Monitor the opening of.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S702, S704, S706) in the above-described prize opening switch / error monitoring process will be described. This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on the count switches 38a and 39a of the big prize opening and the start opening 2 switch 37a in the ordinary electric power. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the prize opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S721) to determine whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period ( Step S722). The fraud monitoring period is a period in which the big prize opening 1 (the first special variable prize winning device 38) is closed when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the lower count switch 38a, and the prize opening for error monitoring. When the switch is the up count switch 39a, it is a period in which the big winning opening 2 (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is closed, and when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the start opening 2 switch 37a, This is a period during which the ordinary train (ordinary variable winning device 37) is closed. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the fraud monitoring period flag area is defined on the fraud monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706.

If it is determined in step S722 that it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S722; No), the process proceeds to step S732.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S722 that it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S722; Yes), it is checked whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S723), and it is determined whether or not there is an input. (Step S724). In the case of this embodiment, data for determining whether or not there is an input is defined on the fraud monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706.
If it is determined in step S724 that there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S724; No), the process proceeds to step S734.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S724 that there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S724; Yes), the target illegal prize number is updated by +1 (step S725), and the updated illegal prize number is monitored. It is checked whether or not the target fraud determination number has been exceeded (step S726), and it is determined whether or not it has been exceeded (step S727). In the case of the present embodiment, the illegal winning number area address and the illegal winning determination number (five) are defined on the fraud monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706. Here, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a gaming ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is counted by a count switch. This is because when a prize is passed past the valid period of the time, or when noise is added to the signal, it is not judged to be illegal, and it is not illegal, but it is not easily judged as an error.

If it is determined in step S727 that the number of fraudulent winnings has exceeded the number of fraud occurrence determination (step S727; Yes), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determination (step S728), and the target fraud winning notification timer area The initial value (for example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved in (Step S729). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the illegal winning notification timer area is defined on the fraud monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706.
Next, a target illegal prize occurrence command is prepared (step S730), an illegal prize occurrence flag is set as an illegal flag (step S731), and the process proceeds to step S740. In the case of this embodiment, an illegal winning occurrence command is defined on the fraud monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S727 that the number of fraudulent winnings does not exceed the fraud occurrence determination number (step S727; No), the process proceeds to step S732.
In step S732, a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S732), and thereafter, a winning number counter update process (step S733) for setting a winning ball is performed, and the process proceeds to step S734. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning monitoring table is defined on the fraud monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706.
In step S734, it is checked whether the target unauthorized prize notification timer has already timed up or timed up after -1 update (step S734), and it is determined whether the time has expired (step S735).
If it is determined in step S735 that the illegal prize notification timer has not expired (step S735; No), the illegal & prize monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S735 that the illegal prize notification timer has expired (step S735; Yes), it is determined whether it is an error notification end timing (step S736).

If it is determined in step S736 that it is not the error notification end timing (step S736; No), a target illegal winning cancellation command is prepared (step S738), and an illegal winning cancellation flag is set as an illegal flag (step S739). ), The process proceeds to step S740. In the case of this embodiment, an unauthorized winning cancellation command is defined on the unauthorized monitoring table prepared in step S701, step S703, or step S706.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S736 that it is the error notification end timing (step S736; Yes), the target illegal winning number is reset (step S737), and the target illegal prize canceling command is prepared (step S738). ), An unauthorized winning cancellation flag is set as an unauthorized flag (step S739), and the process proceeds to step S740.
In step S740, the fraud flag set in step S731 or step S739 is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S740) to determine whether or not they match (step S741).

If it is determined in step S741 that the set fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S741; Yes), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S741 that the set fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S741; No), the set fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S742). ), A command setting process (step S743) is performed, and the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be. Further, an illegal winning error command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 as the error is released. The payout control device 200 performs a process of preventing the payout of the winning ball during the period from the reception of the illegal prize error command to the reception of the illegal prize error release command. Further, the payout control device 200 performs a process of prohibiting the launch of the game ball so as not to output the launch permission signal to the launch control device during the period from the receipt of the unauthorized prize error command to the receipt of the unauthorized prize error release command. .

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S708) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S733) in the above-described fraud & winning monitoring process will be described.
In the winning number counter update process, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the number of winning-port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning monitoring table (step S751). In the case of this embodiment, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is defined for each switch on the winning monitoring table prepared in step S707 or step S732.
Next, it is checked whether or not there is an input (more accurately, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch (step S752), and it is determined whether or not there is an input (step S753). In the case of this embodiment, data for determining whether there is an input (bit data on the input port of the switch to be monitored) is defined for each switch on the winning monitoring table prepared in step S707 or step S732. Yes.

If it is determined in step S753 that there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S753: No), the process proceeds to step S758.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S753 that there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S753; Yes), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded (step S754). In this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area is defined for each switch on the winning monitoring table prepared in step S707 or step S732.
Next, the target winning number counter is updated by +1 and it is checked whether it overflows (step S755), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S756).
If it is determined in step S756 that the target winning number counter overflows (step S756; Yes), the process proceeds to step S758.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S756 that the target winning number counter does not overflow (step S756; No), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area (step S757), and the process proceeds to step S758. .

In step S758, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S758).
If it is determined in step S758 that monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step S758; No), the process returns to step S752.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S758 that all the switches have been monitored (step S758; Yes), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Error check processing]
Next, the error check process (steps S711, S714) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described.
In the error check process, as shown in FIG. 23, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to the error scan counter is acquired (step S761). In the case of this embodiment, on the gaming machine error monitoring table prepared in step S710 or step S713, the addresses of the error monitoring table are defined for the number of errors to be monitored (4 or 2).
Next, the state of the switch to be monitored is checked (step S762), and it is determined whether or not the switch is ON (step S763). In the present embodiment, data for determining the state of the switch is defined on the error monitoring table acquired in step S761.

  If it is determined in step S763 that the switch to be monitored is ON (step S763: Yes), an error occurrence flag is set as an error flag (step S764), and a target error notification command is prepared (step S765). ) The target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S766), and the process proceeds to step S770. In the present embodiment, an error notification command and an error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value are defined on the error monitoring table acquired in step S761.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S763 that the switch to be monitored is not ON (step S763: No), an error release flag is set as an error flag (step S767), and a target error notification end command is prepared ( In step S768), the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S769), and the process proceeds to step S770. In the present embodiment, an error notification end command and an error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value are defined on the error monitoring table acquired in step S761.

In step S770, the value of the target switch state area is compared with the current switch state (step S770), and it is determined whether or not they match (step S771). In the present embodiment, the address of the switch state area is defined on the error monitoring table acquired in step S761.
If it is determined in step S771 that the value of the target switch state area matches the current switch state (step S771; Yes), that is, if the switch state has not changed, the process proceeds to step S774.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S771 that the value of the target switch state area does not match the current switch state (step S771; No), that is, if the switch state changes, the current switch state is displayed in the switch state area. The state is saved (step S772), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S773), and the process proceeds to step S774. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the error monitoring timer area is defined on the error monitoring table acquired in step S761.
In step S774, the target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 and it is checked whether the monitoring timer comparison value has been reached (step S774), and it is determined whether it has been reached (step S775).

If it is determined in step S775 that the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S775: No), the error check process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S775 that the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S775: Yes), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 to the comparison value -1. It stops (step S776).
Next, the set error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area (step S777), and it is determined whether or not they match (step S778). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the error flag area is defined on the error monitoring table acquired in step S761.

If it is determined in step S778 that the set error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step S778; Yes), the error check process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S778 that the set error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (step S778; No), the set error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S779). ), A command setting process (step S780) is performed, and the error check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step S108) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In this special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  In the special game process, as shown in FIG. 24, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In this start port switch monitoring process, if a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted and based on the winnings. Prior to the start of the special figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a winning is determined in advance.

Next, the count switch monitoring process 1 (step A2) is performed. In the count switch monitoring process 1, a process of monitoring the count number of the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
Next, the count switch monitoring process 2 (step A3) is performed. In the count switch monitoring process 2, a process of monitoring the count number of the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed.

Next, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already timed up or timed up after -1 update (step A4), and it is determined whether or not the time has expired (step A5).
When it is determined in step A5 that the special figure game processing timer has not expired (step A5; No), the process proceeds to step A23.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A5 that the special figure game process timer has expired (step A5; Yes), the special figure game sequence branch table referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. Is set in the register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A7).
Next, the return address after the end of the branch process is saved in the stack area (step A8), and the game branch process (step A9) is performed according to the special figure game process number.

In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A10) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A11) is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, setting a fanfare command according to the type of the big hit or the small hit, A special chart display process (step A12) is performed for setting the fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening pattern for each big win or small hit, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like.

In step A9, if the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. The fanfare / interval processing (step A13) is performed.
In step A9, if the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A14) for setting information necessary to perform the ball process is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and a big hit end process are performed. The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A15) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A16) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process (step A9) is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “7” in step A9, the special winning opening open process 2 (step A17) is performed.

In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “8”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the process during the small hit A small hitting fanfare process (step A18) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a small hitting process (step A19) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. .
In step A9, if the special figure game process number is “10”, the middle hit process 2 (step A20) is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “11”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A21) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A9, when the special figure game process number is “12”, a small hit end process (step A22) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

Thereafter, a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step A23), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step A24) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed.
Next, a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is prepared (step A25), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A26) related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is completed. To do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the start port switch monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 25, first, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 (start winning prize port 36) is prepared (step A31). (Step A32) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won (step). A33).
If it is determined in step A33 that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A33; Yes), the process proceeds to step A36.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A33 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A33; No), the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). A check is made (step A34), and it is determined whether or not the number is greater than the number of fraud determination (step A35). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

If it is determined in step A35 that the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is not equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (step A35; No), the process proceeds to step A36.
In step A36, a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) is prepared (step A36), and then the special drawing start opening switch common processing (step A37) is performed to start the start opening. The switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A35 that the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is greater than or equal to the fraud determination number (step A35; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A32 and A37) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. This special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

In the special figure start port switch common process, as shown in FIG. 26, first, it is checked whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A41). ), It is determined whether or not there is an input (step A42). In the present embodiment, data for determining whether there is an input is defined on the table prepared in step A31 or step A36.
If it is determined in step A42 that there is no input to the monitoring target starter switch (step A42; No), the special-purpose starter switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A42 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A42; Yes), the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch is saved (step A43). In the case of the present embodiment, a start opening winning flag is defined on the table prepared in step A31 or step A36.

Next, the number of times that information related to the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (start port signal output count) is loaded (step A44). The signal output count is updated by +1 and it is checked whether it overflows (step A45), and it is determined whether it overflows (step A46).
If it is determined in step A46 that the start port signal output count does not overflow (step A46; No), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A47), and the process proceeds to step A48. Transition.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A46 that the start port signal output count overflows (step A46; Yes), the process proceeds to step A48.

  In step A48, it is checked whether the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitored starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (for example, 4). (Step A48), it is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (Step A49). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the special figure reservation number area is defined on the table prepared in step A31 or step A36.

If it is determined in step A49 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit value (step A49; No), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A49 that the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A49; Yes), the number of special figure reservations to be updated is updated by one (step A50).
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command (MODE) of the start opening switch to be monitored is prepared from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a (step A51), and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared. A pending number command (ACTION) is prepared (step A52), and command setting processing (step A53) is performed.
Next, the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the special figure hold number is calculated (step A54). In the present embodiment, the start address of the random number save area is defined on the table prepared in step A31 or step A36.
Next, a big hit random number is extracted and prepared (step A55), and the prepared big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number saving area of the RWM (step A56).

Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A57), and the prepared jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number saving area of the RWM (step A58). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the jackpot symbol random number area is defined on the table prepared in step A31 or step A36.
Next, the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number 1 is extracted and saved in the RWM fluctuation pattern random number 1 save area (step A59), and the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number 2 is extracted and saved in the RWM fluctuation pattern random number 2 save area. (Step A60), the corresponding variation pattern random number 3 is extracted and saved in the RWM variation pattern random number 3 save area (step A61).
Next, special figure hold information determination processing (step A62) is performed, and the target start opening winning flag is loaded as a change order flag (step A63).
Next, the address of the change order flag save area corresponding to the total number of special figure holds is calculated (step A64), the change order flag is saved in the change order flag save area (step A65), and the special figure start port switch is common. The process ends.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A62) in the special figure start port switch common process described above will be described. This special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process in which the result related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure hold information determination process, as shown in FIG. 27, first, it is checked whether or not a condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied (step A71), and it is determined whether or not it is satisfied (step A72).
If it is determined in step A72 that the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are not satisfied (step A72; No), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it determines with satisfy | filling the conditions which may perform a prefetch effect by step A72 (step A72; Yes), the process regarding the following prefetch effects is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, since it does not have the function of changing the symbols in an order different from the winning order, the input of the start port switch related to step A42 of the special figure start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the pre-reading effect unconditionally both in the case of the input and the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In the present embodiment, since the pre-reading effect is not executed during the big hit operation and the small hit operation, the pre-reading effect may be executed when the special figure game process number is less than “3” in step A72. It is determined that the condition is satisfied.

In the process related to the prefetching effect performed when it is determined that the condition for executing the prefetching effect is satisfied (step A72; Yes), first, whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit A jackpot determination process (step A73) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result is a jackpot (step A74).
When it is determined in step A74 that the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A74; Yes), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A75), and the big hit symbol is determined. The random number is checked, the corresponding jackpot information table is acquired, set (step A76), and the process proceeds to step A81. In the case of the present embodiment, on the jackpot symbol random number check table set in step A75, a random number judgment value (representing a distribution rate) and a jackpot information table address corresponding to the judgment value are defined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A74 that the determination result of the big hit determination process is not big hit (step A74; No), whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A77) is performed to determine whether the determination result is a small hit (step A78).
If it is determined in step A78 that the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A78; Yes), a small hit information table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A79). The process proceeds to step A81.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A78 that the determination result of the small hit determination process is not a small hit (step A78; No), a deviation information table is set (step A80), and the process proceeds to step A81.

In step A81, the symbol information is acquired from the information table set in step A76, step A79, or step A80 and saved in the symbol information (working) area (step A81), and step A76, step A79, or step The start opening winning effect symbol command is acquired from the information table set at A80, and the starting opening winning effect symbol command is saved in the winning effect symbol command area of the RWM (step A82). In the case of the present embodiment, the symbol information and the start opening winning effect symbol command are defined on the information table set in step A76, step A79, or step A80.
Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored is prepared (step A83), and the target start port winning effect command setting table is prepared (step S83). A84).
Next, a special figure information setting process (step A85) for setting special figure information set for the monitoring target start port, and a latter half fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a second half fluctuation pattern among the fluctuation modes in the special figure fluctuation display game. (Step A86), a variation pattern setting process (Step A87) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a start opening prize command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number of the set variation pattern is calculated and prepared (step A88), and the value of the second half variation number is prepared as a start opening prize effect command (ACTION). (Step A89), command setting processing (Step A90) is performed.
Next, the start opening winning effect command command is loaded and prepared from the winning effect symbol command area (step A91), the command setting process (step A92) is performed, and the special figure holding information determination process is terminated. That is, a start opening prize effect command is prepared in steps A88 and A89, and a starting opening prize effect symbol command is prepared in step A91, so that the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory is obtained. , It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, in particular by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc. The result related information can be notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game.

[Count switch monitoring process 1]
Next, the count switch monitoring process 1 (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the count switch monitoring process 1, as shown in FIG. 28, first, it is checked whether or not the big winning opening 1 (first special variable winning device 38) is open (step A101). (Step A102).
If it is determined in step A102 that the big winning opening 1 is being opened in small hits (step A102; Yes), the process proceeds to step A105.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A102 that the big winning opening 1 is not open to the big hit (step A102; No), it is checked whether the big winning opening 1 is open to the big hit (step A103) and the big hit is being opened. (Step A104).

In Step A104, when it is determined that the big winning opening 1 is not being opened (Step A104; No), the count switch monitoring process 1 is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the big prize opening 1 is being opened to the big hit (step A104; Yes), the process proceeds to step A105.
In step A105, it is checked whether there is an input from the count switch 1 (lower count switch 38a) (step A105), and it is determined whether there is an input (step A106).

When it is determined in step A106 that there is no input from the count switch 1 (step A106; No), that is, when the winning of the game ball to the first special variable winning device 38 is not detected, the count switch monitoring process 1 is finished.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A106 that there is an input from the count switch 1 (step A106; Yes), that is, if a winning of a game ball to the first special variable winning device 38 is detected, a counter update process is performed. (Step A107) is performed, and the count switch monitoring process 1 is completed.

[Count switch monitoring process 2]
Next, the count switch monitoring process 2 (step A3) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the count switch monitoring process 2, as shown in FIG. 29, first, it is checked whether or not the big winning opening 2 (second special variable winning device 39) is open (Step A111). (Step A112).
In Step A112, when it is determined that the big winning opening 2 is open for small hits (Step A112; Yes), the process proceeds to Step A115.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A112 that the big winning opening 2 is not open in the big hit (step A112; No), it is checked whether the big winning opening 2 is open in the big hit (step A113) and the big win is open. (Step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the big winning opening 2 is not being opened (step A114; No), the count switch monitoring process 2 ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A114 that the big winning opening 2 is being opened to the big hit (step A114; Yes), the process proceeds to step A115.
In step A115, it is checked whether there is an input from the count switch 2 (upper count switch 39a) (step A115), and it is determined whether there is an input from the count switch 2 (step A116).

When it is determined in step A116 that there is no input from the count switch 2 (step A116; No), that is, when the winning of the game ball to the second special variable winning device 39 is not detected, the count switch monitoring process 2 is finished.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A116 that there is an input from the count switch 2 (step A116; Yes), that is, if a winning of a game ball to the second special variable winning device 39 is detected, the counter update process (Step A117) is performed.

Next, it is checked whether or not the count number of the winning prize counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 9) (step A118), and it is determined whether or not it has reached (step A119). Note that the upper limit value of the big prize winning counter is the number of game balls that can be won in the second special variable winning device 39 in one round game.
If it is determined in step A119 that the number of winning prize counts has not reached the upper limit (step A119; No), the count switch monitoring process 2 ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the number of big prize winning counts has reached the upper limit (step A119; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize opening 2 is open to the big hit (step A120).

In Step A120, when it is determined that the big winning opening 2 is not open to the big hit (Step A120; No), the count switch monitoring process 2 is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A120 that the big winning opening 2 is being opened in the big hit (step A120; Yes), the value of the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value area is loaded in order to end the intermittent release operation. Thus, the intermittent release control pointer area is saved (step A121), and the count switch monitoring process 2 is terminated.

[Count update processing]
Next, the count update process (step A107) in the above-described count switch monitoring process 1 and the count update process (step A117) in the above-described count switch monitoring process 2 will be described.
In the count update process, as shown in FIG. 30, the winning prize count number is updated by +1 (step A131), and it is checked whether the updated winning prize count number has reached the upper limit (for example, 9). (Step A132), and it is determined whether or not it has been reached (Step A133).

If it is determined in step A133 that the number of winning prize counts has not reached the upper limit (step A133; No), the count update process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A133 that the number of winning prizes has reached the upper limit (step A133; Yes), the special game process timer is cleared to 0 (step A134), and the count update process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the special figure routine process (step A10) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the special figure normal processing, as shown in FIG. 31, first, it is checked whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0 (step A201). ), Whether it is 0 or not is determined (step A202).
If it is determined in step A202 that the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold are 0 (step A202; Yes), it is checked whether a customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A203) and started. It is determined whether it has been performed (step A204). The customer waiting demonstration is started when the special figure variation display game is not performed and the touch signal is in the off state (the state where the player's firing operation is not detected). When this customer waiting demo is started, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area. Therefore, it is determined here whether there is a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area.

If it is determined in step A204 that the customer waiting demo has started (step A204; Yes), that is, if the customer waiting demo flag flag is not set in the customer waiting demo flag area, the special figure normal process transition setting is performed. Processing 1 (step A211) is performed, and the special figure routine processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A204 that the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A204; No), that is, if the customer waiting demo flag flag is not set in the customer waiting demo flag region, the customer waiting demo flag region is set. The customer waiting demo flag is saved (step A205), a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A206), and command setting processing (step A207) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether there is a signal related to right-handed (whether the firing position designation signal is ON) (step A208).
If it is determined in step A208 that there is a signal related to right-handed (step A208; Yes), that is, if the launch position designation signal is ON (right-handed), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A211) ) To complete the special figure routine processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A208 that there is no right-handed signal (step A208; No), that is, if the firing position designation signal is OFF (left-handed), a right-handed warning end command is prepared ( Step A209), command setting process (step A210), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A211) are performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. As a result, the right-handed warning is terminated so that the right-handed warning (display or sound output prompting the user to return to the left-handed) will not continue to be executed even when the customer enters a waiting state.

  If it is determined in step A202 that the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not 0 (step A202; No), the variable order flag is loaded from the variable order flag save area (step A212). It is checked whether the loaded change order flag is a flag indicating the start of change in FIG. 1 (step A213), and it is determined whether it is a flag indicating the start of change in FIG. 1 (step A214).

If it is determined in step A214 that the change order flag is a flag indicating the start of change in special figure 1 (step A214; Yes), special figure 1 change start process 1 (step A215) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is (a firing position designation signal is ON) (step A216).
If it is determined in step A216 that there is a signal related to right-handed (step A216; Yes), that is, if the launch position designation signal is ON (right-handed), the special-figure changing process transition setting in FIG. Processing (step A219) is performed, and the special figure routine processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A216 that there is no right-handed signal (step A216; No), that is, if the firing position designation signal is OFF (left-handed), a right-handed warning end command is prepared ( Step A217), command setting processing (step A218), and special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A219) in FIG. As a result, a right-handed warning (a display or a sound output prompting the user to return to the left-handed side) started based on the detection of passage through the gate (usually the start gate 34) other than during the right-handed period is given to the start port 1 (start winning port). 36) The right-handed warning is terminated by determining that the left-handed sound has been returned by the passage detection.

When it is determined in step A214 that the change order flag is not a flag indicating the start of change in FIG. 1 (step A214; No), that is, when the change order flag is a flag indicating the start of change in FIG. Performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step A220), and determines whether or not there is a signal related to hitting (whether the firing position designation signal is ON) (step A221).
If it is determined in step A221 that there is a signal related to right-handed (step A221; Yes), that is, if the launch position designation signal is ON (right-handed), the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting of special figure 2 The process (step A225) is performed, and the special figure routine process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A221 that there is no right-handed signal (step A221; No), that is, if the firing position designation signal is OFF (left-handed), whether or not a right-handed warning is being issued. Determination is made (step A222).

If it is determined in step A222 that a right-handed warning is being issued (step A222; Yes), the special-figure changing process transition setting process (step A225) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A222 that a right-handed warning is not in progress (step A222; No), a right-handed warning start command is prepared (step A223), command setting processing (step A224), A figure transition process transition setting process (step A225) is performed, and the special figure routine process is terminated. As a result, a right-handed warning (a prompt to return to left-handed) is displayed when the starting memory (special figure 2 holding number) in FIG. 2 occurs without passing through the gate (normal figure starting gate 34) for some reason. And audio output) are started.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, the special figure ordinary process transition setting process 1 (step A211) in the above-described special figure ordinary process and the special figure ordinary process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the later-described special figure display process will be described.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, as shown in FIG. 32, first, “0” relating to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A231), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. (Step A232), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset (step A233).
Next, a flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the special prize opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A234), and a flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the special prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A235). The normal process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing 1]
Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (step A215) in the special figure usual process described above will be described. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game.
In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1, as shown in FIG. 33, first, deviation information and jackpot information are set in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A241) is performed.
Next, a small hit flag 1 setting process (step A242) for setting shift information and small hit information is performed on the small hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit.

Next, a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed, and a signal corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol number of the set special figure 1 stop symbol ( For example, the symbol 2 data signal, which is continuously output until the data value changes, is saved in the test signal output data area (step A244), and the stop symbol pattern information (set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process) ( The symbol information) is saved in the symbol information (work) area of the RWM (step A245).
Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step A246), and the prepared special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step A247).
Next, a target table (for special figure 1) for setting information related to the variation pattern is prepared (step A248), and special figure information setting processing (step A249) for setting special figure information is performed.
Next, of the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game, the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A250) for setting the latter half variation pattern, and the variation pattern setting process (step A250) for setting the variation aspect of the first special figure variation display game. A251), the fluctuation start information setting process (step A252) for setting the fluctuation start information of the first special figure is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 is finished.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A241) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the big hit flag 1 setting process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A261).
Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM jackpot random number save area (for special figure 1) and prepared (step A262), and the jackpot is hit depending on whether or not the value of the prepared jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value. A jackpot determination process (step A263) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result is a jackpot (step A264).

When it is determined in step A264 that the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (step A264; No), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A264 that the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A264; Yes), the big hit information is overwritten on the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A261 and saved. (Step A265), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.

[Small hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the small hit flag 1 setting process (step A242) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the small hit flag 1 setting process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A271).
Next, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A272), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (step A273).

If it is determined in step A273 that the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A273; Yes), that is, if the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area 1, the big hit random number save area (see Fig. 1) of the RWM. Is cleared to 0 (step A279), and the small hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A273 that the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A273; No), that is, if the big hit information is not saved in the big hit flag area 1, the big hit random number save area (special figure) of the RWM 1) is loaded and prepared (step A274), and special figure 1 determination data is prepared (step A275).
Next, a small hit determination process (step A276) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number prepared in step A274 matches the small hit determination value. Is a small hit (step A277).

If it is determined in step A277 that the determination result of the small hit determination process is not a small hit (step A277; No), the RWM big hit random number save area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0 (step A279), The small hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A277 that the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A277; Yes), the small hit information is stored in the small hit flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A271. Overwrite and save (step A278), clear the RWM big hit random number save area (for special figure 1) to 0 (step A279), and end the small hit flag 1 setting process.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A291), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (step A292).

When it is determined in step A292 that the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A292; Yes), the big hit symbol table of special figure 1 is set (step A293), and the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A294), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and prepared (step A295). In the case of the present embodiment, on the jackpot symbol table of special figure 1 set in step A293, a random number determination value (representing a distribution rate) and a stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value are defined.
Next, the stop symbol number (for example, any one of “1” to “100”) acquired in step A295 is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A296).

Next, it is determined whether or not the power transmission is being supported (during the short-time state) (step A297).
If it is determined in step A297 that the power transmission is being supported (step A297; Yes), a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table for a high probability and a short time is prepared (step A298). A stop symbol information setting process (step A300) for setting the execution mode of the special game state according to the type and setting the game after the special game state ends is performed, and the process proceeds to step A308.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A297 that the power transmission is not supported (step A297; No), a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the low probability is prepared (step A299), and the stop symbol information setting process (step A299) Step A300) is performed, and the process proceeds to Step A308.

If it is determined in step A292 that the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A292; No), it is checked whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A301) to determine whether or not the big hit flag is a small hit. (Step A302).
When it is determined in step A302 that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A302; Yes), the small hit release information in FIG. 1 is saved in the small hit big winning opening information area (step A303). The stop symbol number at the time of small hit (for example, “101”) is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A304), and the symbol information at the time of the special symbol 1 small hit (for example, “2”) is stored in the symbol information area. (Step A305) and the process proceeds to step A308.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A302 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A302; No), the stop symbol number (for example, “0”) at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area. (Step A306) The symbol information at the time of loss (for example, “0”) is saved in the symbol information area (Step A307), and the process proceeds to Step A308.
Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

In step A308, a decoration special figure command table is set (step A308), and then a decoration special figure command (ACTION) corresponding to the symbol information is acquired (step A309). In the case of the present embodiment, a decoration special figure command (ACTION) is defined on the decoration special figure command table set in step A308.
Then, a special decoration figure 1 command (MODE) is set (step A310), the command is saved in the special decoration figure command area (step A311), and the big hit symbol random number saving area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step A312), the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing 1]
Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step A220) in the special figure usual process described above will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game.
In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1, as shown in FIG. 37, first, shift information and jackpot information are set in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A321) is performed.
Next, a small hit flag 2 setting process (step A322) for setting shift information and small hit information to the small hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small hit is performed.

Next, a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A323) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol is performed, and a signal corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol number of the set special figure 2 stop symbol ( For example, the symbol 3 data signal, which is continuously output until the data value changes, is saved in the test signal output data area (step A324), and the stop symbol pattern information (set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process) ( The symbol information) is saved in the symbol information (work) area of the RWM (step A325).
Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step A326), and the prepared special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step A327).
Next, a target table (for special figure 2) for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step A328), and special figure information setting processing (step A329) for setting special figure information is performed.
Next, among the variation modes in the second special figure variation display game, the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A330) for setting the latter half variation pattern, and the variation pattern setting process (step A330) for setting the variation aspect of the second special figure variation display game A331), the fluctuation start information setting process (step A332) for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A321) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the big hit flag 2 setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A331).
Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM jackpot random number save area (for special figure 2) and prepared (step A332), and the jackpot is hit depending on whether or not the value of the prepared jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value. A jackpot determination process (step A333) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result is a jackpot (step A334).

When it is determined in step A334 that the determination result of the big hit determination process is not big hit (step A334; No), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A334 that the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A334; Yes), the big hit information is overwritten on the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A331 and saved. (Step A335), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

[Small hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the small hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the small hit flag 2 setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A341).
Next, it is checked whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A342), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (step A343).

When it is determined in step A343 that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A343c; Yes), that is, when the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area 2, the big hit random number save area (see Fig. 2) of the RWM. Is cleared to 0 (step A349), and the small hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A343 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A343; No), that is, if the big hit information is not saved in the big hit flag area 1, the big hit random number save area (see Fig. 2), a big hit random number is loaded and prepared (step A344), and special figure 2 determination data is prepared (step A345).
Next, a small hit determination process (step A346) is performed to determine whether the big hit random number prepared in step A344 matches the small hit determination value or not. Is determined to be a small hit (step A347).

When it is determined in step A347 that the determination result of the small hit determination process is not a small hit (step A347; No), the RWM big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) is cleared to 0 (step A349). The small hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A347 that the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A347; Yes), the small hit information is stored in the small hit flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A341. Overwrite and save (step A348), clear the RWM big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) to 0 (step A349), and end the small hit flag 2 setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, as shown in FIG. 40, first, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A361) to determine whether or not it is a big hit (step A362).
When it is determined in step A362 that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A362; Yes), the big hit symbol table of special figure 2 is set (step A363), and the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 2) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A364), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and prepared (step A365). In the case of this embodiment, on the jackpot symbol table of special figure 2 set in step A363, a random number determination value (representing a distribution rate) and a stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value are defined.
Next, the stop symbol number (for example, any one of “1” to “100”) acquired in step A365 is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A366).
Next, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is prepared (step A367), a stop symbol information setting process (step A368) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A376.

If it is determined in step A362 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A362; No), it is checked whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A369) and it is determined whether the big hit flag is a small hit. (Step A370).
If it is determined in step A370 that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A370; Yes), the small hit release information shown in FIG. 2 is saved in the small hit big opening opening information area (step A371). The symbol number (for example, “101”) at the time of the small hit is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step A372), and the symbol information (for example, “1”) at the time of the special symbol 2 small hit is saved in the symbol information area (Step A373), and the process proceeds to step A376.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A370 that the small hit flag 2 is not small hit (step A370; No), the stop symbol number (for example, “0”) at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area. (Step A374) The symbol information (for example, “0”) at the time of the loss is saved in the symbol information area (Step A375), and the process proceeds to Step A376.
Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

In step A376, a decoration special figure command table is set (step A376), and then a decoration special figure command (ACTION) corresponding to the symbol information is acquired (step A377). In the case of the present embodiment, a decoration special figure command (ACTION) is defined on the decoration special figure command table set in step A376.
Next, a special figure 2 command (MODE) is set (step A378), the command is saved in the special figure command area (step A379), and the jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 2) is cleared to 0 ( Step A380), the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot determination process (step A263) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot determination process (step A333) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described.
In the big hit determination process, as shown in FIG. 41, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A391), and it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A392). It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit determination value (step A393). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

If it is determined in step A393 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A393; Yes), that is, if it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A399) to determine the big hit End the process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A393 that the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A393; No), it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A394).
When it is determined in step A394 that the state is a high probability state (step A394; Yes), an upper limit determination value at the time of high probability is set (step A395), and the upper limit determination value set by the target jackpot random number value is set. It is checked whether it is greater than (upper limit determination value at high probability) (step A397), and it is determined whether it is larger (step A398).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A394 that the state is not a high probability state (step A394; No), an upper limit determination value at a low probability is set (step A336), and an upper limit determination in which the value of the target big hit random number is set. It is checked whether it is larger than the value (upper limit determination value at low probability) (step A397), and it is determined whether it is larger (step A398). In this embodiment, the lower limit determination value is “574”, the upper limit determination value at the low probability is “576”, and the upper limit determination value at the high probability is “603”. Therefore, “574” to “576” are big hits at a low probability, and “574” to “603” are big hits at a high probability.

In step A398, if it is determined that the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value set in step A395 or step A396 (step A398; Yes), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as the determination result. (Step A399), the big hit determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A398 that the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value set in step A395 or step A396 (step A398; No), that is, if it is a big hit, Is set (step A400), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the small hit determination process (step A276) in the small hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit determination process (step A346) in the small hit flag 2 setting process will be described.
In the small hit determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, a small hit lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A411), and it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value. (Step A412), it is determined whether it is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (Step A413). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

If it is determined in step A413 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value for the small hit (step A413; Yes), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A420). The hit determination process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A413 that the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A413; No), whether the determination data prepared immediately before the small hit determination process is the special figure 1 determination data. It is checked (step A414) and it is determined whether or not it is the special figure 1 determination data (step A415).
If it is determined in step A415 that the determination data prepared immediately before the small hit determination process is the special figure 1 determination data (step A415; Yes), that is, the small hit determination process is performed in the small hit flag 1 setting process. In the case of the small hit determination process (step A276), the special figure 1 small hit upper limit determination value is set (step A416), and the small hit upper limit determination value (special figure 1 small hit) set by the target big hit random value is set. It is checked whether it is larger (upper limit determination value) (step A418), and it is determined whether it is larger (step A419).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A415 that the determination data prepared immediately before the small hit determination process is not the special figure 1 determination data (special figure 2 determination data) (step A415; No), that is, the small hit When the determination process is the small hit determination process (step A346) in the small hit flag 2 setting process, a special figure 2 small hit upper limit determination value is set (step A417), and the target big hit random number value is set. It is checked whether it is larger than the hit upper limit determination value (special figure 2 small hit upper limit determination value) (step A418), and it is determined whether it is larger (step A419). In this embodiment, the small hit lower limit determination value is “235”, the special figure 1 small hit upper limit determination value is “237”, and the special figure 2 small hit upper limit determination value is “247”. Therefore, “235” to “237” are small hits when the special figure 1 is determined, and “235” to “247” are small hits when the special figure 2 is determined.

If it is determined in step A419 that the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value set in step A416 or step A417 (step A419; Yes), that is, if it is out of place, the result of the determination is a difference. After setting (step A420), the small hit determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A419 that the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value set in step A416 or step A417 (step A419; No), that is, if it is a small hit, the determination As a result, a small hit is set (step A421), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

[Stop symbol information setting process]
Next, the stop symbol information setting process (step A300) in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process described above and the stop symbol information setting process (step A368) in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process will be described.
In the stop symbol information setting process, as shown in FIG. 43, first, symbol information corresponding to the target stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area (step A431). At this time, since the different stop symbol information table is used depending on whether or not the power transmission is being supported, even if the same stop symbol number is used, the symbol information acquired depending on whether or not the power transmission is being supported It is possible to make it difficult to infer the type of jackpot from the display on the special figure 1 display 51 and the display on the display device 41.

Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A432). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.
Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A433).
Next, the winning symbol opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the winning symbol opening information area (step A434), and the stop symbol information setting process is terminated.
In the case of the present embodiment, the symbol information, probability variation determination flag, round number upper limit value information, and special winning opening release information are displayed on the stopped symbol information table prepared in Step A298, Step A299, or Step A367. It is defined as a plurality of groups according to the number of stop symbol numbers.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the special figure information setting process (step A249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the special figure information setting process (step A329) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the special figure information setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, first, the special figure for the prepared flag (the special figure 1 fluctuation flag prepared in step A246 or the special figure 2 fluctuation flag prepared in step A329) is targeted. Is saved in the symbol determination flag (work) area (step A441), and the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are added as the information generation parameter 1 (step A442).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is during normal power support (during a short time state) (step A443).
If it is determined in step A443 that the power transmission support is not in progress (time saving state) (step A443; No), a value indicating no power transmission support is set as the information generation parameter 2 (step A444), and step A448 is performed. Migrate to
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A443 that the power transmission is being supported (during time reduction) (step A443; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game has a high probability (step A445). .
If it is determined in step A445 that the probability is not high (step A445; No), the information generation parameter 2 is set to a value with low probability and normal power support (step A446), and the process proceeds to step A448. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A445 that the probability is high (step A445; Yes), the information generation parameter 2 is set to a value with high probability and normal power support (step A447), and step A448. Migrate to

In step A448, first-half fluctuation information 1 is generated based on information generation parameters 1 and 2, and is saved in the first-half fluctuation information 1 area (step A448). Thereafter, first-half fluctuation information 2 is generated based on information generation parameter 2. Then, the first half variation information 2 area is saved (step A449).
Here, the first half variation information is information for determining the first half variation pattern until reaching the reach state among the variation patterns. The first half fluctuation information 1 is first half fluctuation information when the result is out of reach and the reach state is not reached. Since the first-half fluctuation information 1 is determined in consideration of the number of special figure reservations, it is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 2. The first-half fluctuation information 2 is first-half fluctuation information when the result is out of reach and reach is reached, or when the result is a big hit or a small hit. In the first half fluctuation information 2, the first half fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure reservation number. It should be noted that at the time when the first half fluctuation information 1 and 2 are generated, which is used is not determined, and is determined with reference to other information generation parameters later.

Next, the second-half fluctuation group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 2 and saved in the target second-half fluctuation group information area (step A450). A symbol discrimination flag (for work), which is information for discriminating between FIGS. 1 and 2, is loaded (step A451).
Next, the first variation group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 2 and 3, and is saved in the target first variation group information area (step A452).
Next, symbol information (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 4 (step A453), and a variable group selection table pointer is generated based on the information generation parameters 2 and 4 (step A454). The setting process ends.
In the case of the present embodiment, on the table prepared in step A248 or step A328, the address of the first half fluctuation information 1 area (used in step A448), the address of the first half fluctuation information 2 area (used in step A449), Address of first half variation group information area (used in step A452), address of second half variation group information area (used in step A450), address of random number save area of fluctuation pattern random number 1, random number save area of fluctuation pattern random number 2 The address, the address of the second half variation number area, and the address of the random number save area of the variation pattern random number 3 are defined.

[Second half fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process (step A250) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process (step A330) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the latter half variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 45, first, the address of the variation group selection table corresponding to the variation group selection table pointer is calculated and prepared (step A461). In the present embodiment, the addresses of the variation group selection table are defined on the variation group selection table before calculation by the number of variation group selection table pointers.

Next, it is checked whether the symbol information (for work) is off symbol information (step A462), and it is determined whether it is off symbol information (step A463).
When it is determined in step A463 that the symbol information (for work) is not out of symbol information (step A463; No), the process proceeds to step A466.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A463 that the symbol information (for work) is out-of-order symbol information (step A453; Yes), the latter-half variation group information is loaded from the target latter-half variation group information region (step A464). .
Next, an address corresponding to the latter half fluctuation group information is additionally calculated and prepared as a fluctuation group selection table (step A465), and the process proceeds to step A466. In the present embodiment, the address of the variation group selection table is defined on the outlier variation group selection table. In the case of the present embodiment, additional calculation is performed to change the table for each number of holdings at the time of loss, and the number of holdings is not affected at the time of big hit.

In step A466, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A466). Thereafter, a 2-byte sorting process (step A467) is performed, and the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step A468). In the case of this embodiment, the distribution value of the variation pattern random number 1 and the address of the latter half variation selection table corresponding to the distribution value are defined on the variation group selection table.
Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the target area (step A469), and a sorting process (step A470) is performed to obtain the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the sorting (step A471). In the present embodiment, the distribution value of the variation pattern random number 2 and the latter-half variation number corresponding to the distribution value are defined on the latter-half variation selection table.
Next, the latter half variation number is saved in the target latter variation number area (step A472), and the latter half variation pattern setting process is terminated.
As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, on the table prepared in step A248 or step A328, the address of the first half fluctuation information 1 area, the address of the first half fluctuation information 2 area, the address of the first half fluctuation group information area, the second half The address of the variation group information area (used in step A464), the address of the random number save area of the variation pattern random number 1 (used in step A466), the address of the random number save area of the variation pattern random number 2 (used in step A469), The address of the second half variation number area (used in step A472) and the address of the random number save area of the variation pattern random number 3 are defined.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A251) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A331) of the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, the first-half variation group information is first loaded from the target first-half variation group information area (step A481), and the first-half variation group table corresponding to the loaded first-half variation group information. Is calculated (step A482). In the case of the present embodiment, the addresses of the first variation group table are defined for the number of first variation group information on the first variation group address table before calculation.

Next, the latter half variation number is loaded from the target area (step A483), and the address corresponding to the loaded latter half variation number is calculated using the calculated table (step A484). In the case of the present embodiment, the determination value of the second half variation number and the address of the first half variation pattern selection address table corresponding to the second half variation number are defined on the first half variation group table.
Next, it is checked whether the latter half change number is a change number without reach (step A485), and it is determined whether it is a change number without reach (step A486).
If it is determined in step A486 that the second-half variation number is an unreachable variation number (step A486; Yes), the first-half variation information 1 is loaded from the target first-half variation information 1 area (step A487). Move to A489.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A486 that the latter half variation number is not a reachless variation number (step A486; No), the first half variation information 2 is loaded from the target first half variation information 2 area (step A488), Control goes to step A489.

In step A489, the address corresponding to the first half variation information is calculated using the calculated table (step A489), and then the address of the first half variation selection table is acquired from the calculated address and prepared (step A490). . In the present embodiment, the addresses of the first half variation selection table are defined on the first half variation pattern selection address table by the number of the first half variation information 1 or 2.
Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A491), and a distribution process (step A492) is performed.
Subsequently, the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A493), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In the case of this embodiment, the distribution value of the variation pattern random number 3 and the first variation number corresponding to the distribution value are defined on the first variation selection table.
As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, on the table prepared in step A248 or step A328, the address of the first half fluctuation information 1 area (used in step A487) and the address of the first half fluctuation information 2 area (step A488). ), The address of the first half variation group information area (used in step A481), the address of the second half variation group information area, the address of the random number save area of the variation pattern random number 1, the address of the random number save area of the variation pattern random number 2, The address of the second half variable number area (used in step A483) and the address of the random number save area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (used in step A491) are defined.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (step A252) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the fluctuation start information setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described.
In the change start information setting process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, the random number save area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared to 0 (step A511), and the first half change time value table is set (step A512). ), The first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A513).
Next, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A514), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A515).

Next, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A516), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A517).
Next, a fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is calculated and prepared (step A518), the value of the second half fluctuation number is prepared as a fluctuation command (ACTION) (step A519), and command setting processing (step A520). )I do.

Next, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area and prepared (step A521), and command setting processing is performed (step A522).
Next, a decoration special figure holding number command (MODE) corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A523), the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A524), and the variation symbol discrimination is performed. The special figure hold number corresponding to the flag is updated by -1 (step A525).
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A526), and command setting processing is performed (step A527).
Next, the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is shifted (step A528), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step A529), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game including information regarding the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set and transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Examples of the information related to the start of the special figure fluctuation display game include, for example, a fluctuation pattern command including information on a fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, and stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Corresponding decoration special figure command, decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure reservation number command) concerning the decoration special figure start memory display which is displayed on display device 41 is mentioned.
As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, on the table prepared in step A248 or step A328, the address of the first half fluctuation information 1 area, the address of the first half fluctuation information 2 area, the address of the first half fluctuation group information area, the second half The address of the fluctuation group information area, the address of the random number save area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (used in step A511), the address of the random number save area of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (used in step A511), the address of the second half fluctuation number area, The address (used in step A511) of the random number saving area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is defined.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A219) in the special figure usual process will be described.
In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), as shown in FIG. 48, first, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A541), and the process number is set. Save in the special game process number area (step A542).

Next, a non-customer waiting flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A543), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A544).
Next, the changing flag is saved in the control flag area of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (step A545), and the symbol fluctuation control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control timer area. The initial value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A546), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A225) in the special figure normal process will be described.
In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), as shown in FIG. 49, first, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A551), and the process number is set. Save in the special game process number area (step A552).

Next, a non-customer waiting flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A553), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A554).
Next, the changing flag is saved in the control flag area of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step A555), and the symbol fluctuation control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control timer area. The initial value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A556), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the special figure changing process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the special symbol changing process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is checked whether the symbol information (stop symbol pattern information) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is out-of-sequence symbol information. (Step A601), it is determined whether or not the symbol information is missing (Step A602).

If it is determined in step A602 that the symbol information is a missing symbol (step A602; Yes), it is checked whether the latter half variation number set in the latter half variation pattern setting process is a number without reach (step A603), it is determined whether or not the number is a reachless variation number (step A604).
If it is determined in step A604 that the latter half variation number is a non-reach number (step A604; Yes), a special figure display time pointer (eg, “0”) at the time of losing is set (step A605). Then, the process proceeds to step A608.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A604 that the latter half variation number is not a number without reach (step A604; No), that is, when there is a reach, a special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game, A special figure display time pointer (for example, “1”) at the time of the loss reach in the case of being out of reach and reaching the reach state is set (step A606), and the process proceeds to step A608.
If it is determined in step A602 that the symbol information is not an out-of-order symbol (step A602; No), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, a special symbol display time pointer for the big hit / small hit (for example, “2”) is set (step A607), and the process proceeds to step A608.

In step A608, a special figure display time table is set (step A608), and then a special figure display time corresponding to the special figure display time pointer is acquired (step A609). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A609, the special figure display time pointer at the time of detachment (at the time of detachment without occurrence of reach) set in step A605, the special figure display time pointer at the time of detachment set in step A606, step The special figure display time corresponding to one of the special figure display time pointers at the big hit / small hit set in A607 is acquired from the special figure display time table.
Next, the acquired special figure display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A610), a special figure display process transition setting process (step A611) is performed, and the special figure change process is terminated.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A611) in the special figure changing process will be described.
In the special figure display process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, “2” relating to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A621), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process number. The process number is saved in the area (step A622).

Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A623), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design) (2) The signal during fluctuation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A624).
Next, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output in the external information terminal (step A625).
Next, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a flag relating to the suspension of fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the corresponding fluctuation control flag area (step A626). As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the corresponding fluctuation control flag area (step A627). The process change setting process during figure change is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the special figure displaying process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the special chart display process, as shown in FIG. 52, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step A701), and the RWM is displayed. The small hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704).
Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step A705), and the RWM big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A706).
Next, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag 2 loaded in step A705 is a big hit (step A707), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (step A708).

  When it is determined in step A708 that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A708; Yes), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A709), and the big hit (special figure) of the second special figure variation display game is cleared. Save the signal related to the start of 2 big hits (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, the special symbol 2 signal ON, etc.) in the RWM test signal output data area. (Step A710), the process proceeds to Step A716.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A708 that the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A708; No), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded. (Step A711), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (Step A712).
Next, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag 1 loaded in step A711 is a big hit (step A713), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (step A714).
When it is determined in step A714 that the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A714; Yes), a signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device is operating) The signal is turned ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned ON, the signal per special symbol is turned ON, etc.) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A715), and the process proceeds to step A716.

  In step A716, a round number upper limit table is set (step A716), and then a round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A717). The round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, the round number upper limit value and the round LED pointer are defined on the round number upper limit value table set in step A716.

Next, a probability information command at the time of low probability related to information that sets the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A719), Command setting processing (step A720) is performed.
Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol pattern number) set in the stop symbol information setting process is prepared (step A721), and the command setting process (step A722) is performed.
Next, a special symbol command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol pattern information) related to the special symbol variation display game is loaded from the special RWM command region of the RWM, prepared (step A723), and command setting processing (step A724) is performed.

Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A725). In the present embodiment, in step A716, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state.
Next, right winning determination flags corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state of the winning result in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game are generated (step A726). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A726, if right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, the right-handed determination flag is turned ON, and if left-handed is more advantageous than right-handed, The right strike determination flag is turned off.

Next, the display number of the right-handed notification LED corresponding to the right-handed determination flag is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A727). In the case of the present embodiment, if the right-handed determination flag is ON in step A727, the right-handed notification LED (right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) is turned on in the gaming state display number 2 area. When the right-handed determination flag is OFF, the display number for turning off the right-handed notification LED is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area.
Next, a signal related to right-handedness corresponding to the right-handed determination flag is saved in the test signal output data area (step A728). In this embodiment, when the right-handed determination flag is ON in step A728, the firing position designation signal is saved as ON (right-handed) as a signal related to right-handed, and the right-handed determination flag is OFF. In this case, the firing position designation signal OFF (left-handed) is saved as a signal related to right-handed. In the present embodiment, right-handed and left-handed are represented by one signal (launch position designation signal), but may be represented by different signals.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 8000 msec) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step A747), and the big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game process timer area (step A747). A748).
Next, it is checked whether the special winning opening information is the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (first special variable winning apparatus 38) (step A749), and it is determined whether or not it is the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (step A750). ).
When it is determined in step A750 that the special winning opening information is the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (step A750; Yes), the number of illegal winnings to the special winning opening 1 is reset (step A751). The fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the winning opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A755) is performed, and the special figure display in-process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A750 that the prize winning opening information is not the opening information of the prize winning opening 1 (step A750; No), that is, the prize winning opening information is the prize winning opening 2 (second special variable prize winning device). 39), the number of illegal winnings to the big winning opening 2 is reset (step A753), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A754). ), The fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A755) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step A714 of FIG. 52 that the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A714; No), as shown in FIG. 53, it is checked whether the small hit flag 1 loaded in step A703 is a small hit. (Step A729), it is determined whether or not a small hit (Step A730).
If it is determined in step A730 that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A730; Yes), the process proceeds to step A738.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A730 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A732; No), it is checked whether the small hit flag 2 loaded in step A701 is a small hit (step A731). (Step A732).

When it is determined in step A732 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A732; No), the time reduction variation frequency update process (step A733) and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A734) are performed. Then, the special figure displaying process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A732 that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A732; Yes), it is determined whether there is a signal related to right-handed (whether the firing position designation signal is ON). (Step A735).
If it is determined in step A735 that there is a signal related to right-handed (step A735; Yes), that is, if the launch position designation signal is ON (right-handed), the process proceeds to step A738.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A735 that there is no right-handed signal (step A735; No), that is, if the launch position designation signal is OFF (left-handed), a right-handed warning end command is prepared ( Step A736), command setting processing (Step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to Step A738. As a result, if the start memory of Special Figure 2 that is not during normal power support (during short-running state) is a small hit, the attacker opens and closes at the small hit, so it is right even if it is not actually right-handed The strike warning (display or sound output prompting to return to the left strike) is canceled.

In step A738, a time shortening variation frequency update process (step A738) is performed, and then a fanfare command is prepared (step A739), and a command setting process (step A740) is performed.
Next, a special symbol command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol pattern information) related to the special symbol variation display game is loaded and prepared from the RWM special symbol command area (step A741), and command setting processing (step A742). )I do.
Next, it is checked whether or not the small hit big winning opening information is special figure 1 small hit release information (step A743), and it is determined whether or not it is special figure 1 small hit release information (step A744).
If it is determined in step A744 that the small hitting big opening opening information is special figure 1 small hitting opening information (step A744; Yes), the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A745) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A744 that the small hit big winning opening information is not the special figure 1 small hit release information (step A744; No), the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 2 (step A746) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the time shortening fluctuation number update process (steps A733 and A738) in the above special figure display process will be described.
In the time shortening fluctuation number update process, as shown in FIG. 55, first, it is determined whether or not the time is short (short time state) (step A761). The time reduction means when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a normal probability state and a time reduction state.
If it is determined in step A761 that the time is not short (step A761; No), the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A761 that the time is short (step A761; Yes), the number of time fluctuations for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the time saving state is updated by -1 (step A762) ), It is determined whether or not the number of short-time fluctuations after the update is “0” (step A763).
If it is determined in step A763 that the number of time-varying fluctuations is not “0” (step A763; No), that is, if the time-shortening state continues in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the time-shortening fluctuation number updating process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A763 that the number of time-varying changes is “0” (step A763; Yes), that is, if the time-short state is terminated in the current special figure variation display game, the probability of the time-shortening end. An information command is prepared (step A764), and command setting processing (step A765) is performed.
Next, a signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, 2 signals of the big hit is turned OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A766), and a signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned OFF, Special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal OFF, ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) test signal output data area (Step A767).

Next, a signal related to the end of the right strike (for example, the firing position designation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A768), and the number at the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A769). .
Next, the display number for turning off the right-handed notification LED (the right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A770), and the normal game mode flag area is displayed. Save the low probability figure and no power support flag (step A771).
Subsequently, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A772), the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A773), and the time shortening variation frequency update is performed. The process ends.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A755) in the above special figure display process will be described.
In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, as shown in FIG. 56, first, “3” relating to the fanfare / interval process is set as the process number (step A781), and the process number is designated as the special game process. Save in the number area (step A782).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (eg, 1 signal for the big hit is ON and 4 signals for the big hit is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A783), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (eg, special symbol) 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, The normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A784).
Next, the information of the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is reset (step A785), the number at the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A786), and the normal game mode flag area The flag for ordinary map low probability & no ordinary power support is saved (step A787).

Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset (step A788), and the high probability notification flag area is reset (step A789).
Next, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A790), and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A791).
Next, the time-varying frequency region is reset (step A792), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A745) in the special figure display mid-process described above will be described.
In the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, as shown in FIG. 57, first, “8” related to the small hitting fanfare process is set as a processing number (step A811), and the processing number is designated as a special game. Save in the process number area (step A812).

Next, a small hitting fanfare time (for example, 8000 msec) is set (step A813), and the small hitting fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A814).
Next, a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for the big hit is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A815), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game in FIG. Save the small hit signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A816).

Next, the value of the small hitting round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step A817), and the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area is reset (step A818).
Next, the information on the winning prize opening 1 fraud winning number area is reset (step A819), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the winning prize 1 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A820), and the small hit fanfare mid-process shifts. The setting process 1 ends.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 2]
Next, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 2 (step A746) in the special figure display mid-process described above will be described.
In the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 2, as shown in FIG. 58, first, “8” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as a processing number (step A831), and the processing number is designated as a special game. Save in the process number area (step A832).

Next, a small hitting fanfare time (for example, 8000 milliseconds) is set (step A833), and the small hitting fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A834).
Next, a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A835), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game in FIG. Save the small hit signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A836).

Next, the value of the small hitting round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step A837), and the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area is reset (step A838).
Next, the information on the winning prize opening 2 fraud winning number area is reset (step A839), the fraud monitoring outside flag is saved in the winning prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A840), and the small hit fanfare mid-process shifts. The setting process 2 ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the fanfare / interval process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the fanfare / interval process, as shown in FIG. 59, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and it is checked whether the big winning opening information is the short opening information of the big winning opening 1. (Step A902), it is determined whether the short opening information of the special winning opening 1 (Step A903). Here, the short opening information of the special winning opening 1 is information relating to short opening in which the opening time of the special winning opening 1 (opening time of the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning apparatus 38) is short.

In step A903, when the big winning opening information is the short opening information of the big winning opening 1 (step A903; Yes), the process proceeds to step A908.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A903 that the big winning opening information is not the short opening information of the big winning opening 1 (step A903; No), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared ( Step A904) and command setting processing (Step A905) are performed.
Next, a special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the special symbol variation display game is loaded from the RWM special symbol command area and prepared (step A906), and a command setting process (step A907) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step A908.

In step A908, a special winning opening opening time table is set (step A908), and then the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening release information is acquired from the set special winning opening opening time table (step A909). ), The special winning opening opening time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A910).
Next, it is checked whether the special winning opening information is the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (first special variable winning device 38) (step A911), and it is determined whether or not it is the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (step A912). .
When it is determined in step A912 that the special winning opening release information is the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (step A912; Yes), the special winning opening open process transition setting process (step A913) is performed, and the fanfare is determined. / End the processing during the interval. In the case of the present embodiment, the process for setting the process for opening the big prize opening in step A913 is as follows: "Big win in special figure 1, big prize opening 1 is open, no intermittent" or "Big win in special figure 2 and big prize opening 1 is This is a transition setting process for a pattern of “no release or intermittent”.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A912 that the special winning opening information is not the opening information of the special winning opening 1 (step A912; No), an intermittent release control pointer upper limit table is set (step A914), and the special winning opening is set. The intermittent release control pointer upper limit value corresponding to the release information is acquired and saved in the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value area (step A915). In the present embodiment, the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value corresponding to the big winning opening release information is defined on the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value table set in step A914.
Next, the information in the intermittent control pointer area is cleared (step A916), the special winning opening opening process 2 transition setting process (step A917) is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. In the case of the present embodiment, the process 2 transition setting process in step A917 is “big win in special figure 2, big prize opening 2 is open, there are intermittents” or “big win in special figure 2 and big prize opening” 2 is a transition setting process for a pattern in which “2 is open and no intermittent (a big hit that is processed with 16 rounds of 1.6 seconds open and 0 intermittent times)”.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Next, the process for setting the transition to the special winning opening opening process (step A913) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 60, in the process for setting a process for opening a special winning opening, as shown in FIG. 60, first, the process number is set to “4” relating to the process for opening a special winning opening (step A921). Save in the game process number area (step A922).

Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening 1 (for example, the signal for operating the special electric accessory 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A923), and the opening / closing door of the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. In order to release 38c, the ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening 1 solenoid output data area (step A924).
Note that the output data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b is obtained by branching the electric signal pattern, and at the same time, a test signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening 1 (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal; ON while the solenoid 38b is ON). Is also output.
Next, the information on the number-of-a-winner count area that stores the number of winning-outs to the winning a prize opening is reset (step A925), and the process for setting a process for setting a winning-ahead opening is completed.

[Large winning opening open process 2 transition setting process]
Next, the process for setting the transition to the second prize opening opening process 2 in the above-described fanfare / interval process (step A917) will be described.
In the special winning opening open process 2 transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, the process number is set to “7” related to the special winning opening open process 2 (step A931), and the process number is set. Save in the special figure game process number area (step A932).

Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening 2 (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A933), and the opening / closing member of the second special variable winning device 39 In order to release 39c, the ON data for turning on the big winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the big winning opening 2 solenoid output data area (step A934).
It should be noted that the output data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is obtained by branching the electric signal pattern and simultaneously testing the opening of the special winning opening 2 (for example, the special electric accessory 2 opening signal; ON when the solenoid 39b is ON). Is also output.
Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the special winning opening is reset (step A935), and the special winning opening being released process 2 transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the special winning opening open process (step A14) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the process of opening the big prize opening, first, it is checked whether the big prize opening information is the short opening information of the big prize opening 1 (step A1001), and it is determined whether it is the short opening information of the big prize opening 1. (Step A1002). As described above, the short opening information of the special winning opening 1 is information on short opening in which the opening time of the special winning opening 1 (opening time of the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning apparatus 38) is short.
When it is determined in step A1002 that the special prize opening information is the short opening information of the special prize opening 1 (step A1002; Yes), the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1010) is performed. The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A1002 that the big winning opening information is not the short opening information of the big winning opening 1 (step A1002; No), the current round number and the RWM round number in the special gaming state being executed. The number of rounds in the upper limit value area is compared with the upper limit value to check whether the upper limit value has been reached (that is, whether the current round is the final round) (step A1003) and determine whether it is the final round (step A1003). Step A1004).
If it is determined in step A1004 that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1004; Yes), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared. (Step A1005), command setting processing (Step A1007) is performed, and the process proceeds to Step A1008.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A1004 that the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1004; No), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1006), and command setting processing ( Step A1007) is performed, and the process proceeds to Step A1008.

  In step A1008, a special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the special symbol variation display game is loaded and prepared from the special symbol command area of the RWM (step A1008), and then a command setting process (step A1009), a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1010) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Processing during opening of big prize opening 2]
Next, the special winning opening releasing process 2 (step A17) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the big prize opening opening process 2, first, an intermittent release control pointer is loaded and prepared (step A1101), and the intermittent release control pointer is set to the value of the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value area of the RWM (intermittent release control pointer upper limit). Value) and check whether the upper limit value has been reached (step A1102) and determine whether or not the upper limit value has been reached (step A1103).

If it is determined in step A1103 that the intermittent release control pointer has not reached the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value (step A1103; No), the intermittent release control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1104).
Next, it is checked whether the current round number (current round number) in the special gaming state being executed is the first round (step A1105), and it is determined whether or not it is the first round (step A1106).
When it is determined in step A1106 that the current round number is the first round (step A1106; Yes), the big prize opening operation transition setting process 1 (step A1107) is performed, and the big prize opening opening process 2 is performed. finish.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A1106 that the current round number is not the first round (step A1106; No), the special winning opening operation transition setting process 2 (step A1108) is performed, and the special winning opening open process 2 is performed. Exit.

If it is determined in step A1103 that the intermittent release control pointer has reached the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value (step A1103; Yes), the current round number in the special gaming state being executed (current round number) Is compared with the value of the round number upper limit area of the RWM (round number upper limit value) to check whether the upper limit has been reached (that is, whether the current round is the final round) (step A1109). It is determined whether or not the current round (current round) in the state is the final round (step A1110).
If it is determined in step A1110 that the current round is the final round (step A1110; Yes), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A1111). ), Command setting processing (step A1113) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1114.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A1110 that the current round is not the final round (step A1110; No), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1112), and command setting processing (step A1113) is performed. Go to Step A1114.

  In step A1114, a special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the special symbol variation display game is loaded and prepared from the special symbol command area of the RWM (step A1114), and then a command setting process ( Step A1115), a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process 2 (step A1116) is performed, and the winning prize opening open process 2 is terminated.

[Big prize opening operation transition setting process 1]
Next, the special prize opening operation transition setting process 1 (step A1107) in the above-described special prize opening opening process 2 will be described.
In the special winning opening operation transition setting process 1, as shown in FIG. 64, first, a branching process (step A1121) is performed according to the control pointer (intermittent release control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0” in step A1121, the process number is set to “7” related to the special prize opening opening process 2 (step A1122), and the process number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step A1123).
Next, a waiting time (for example, 6000 milliseconds) for long closing (closing with a long closing time) is set as a waiting time (closing time) after closing the special winning opening 2 (second special variable winning device 39). (Step A1124), the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A1125).
Next, in order to close the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the OFF data for turning off the big winning port solenoid 39b is saved in the big winning port 2 solenoid output data area (step A1126). The winning opening operation transition setting process 1 is terminated.

If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1121, the process number is set to “7” related to the special prize opening opening process 2 (step A1127). The number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1128).
Next, an opening time (for example, 1600 msec) for short opening (opening with a short opening time) is set (step A1129) using the special winning opening 2 (second special variable winning device 39) as an opening time (step A1129). The time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1130).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable prize-winning device 39, ON data for turning on the big prize opening solenoid 38b is saved in the big prize opening 2 solenoid output data area (step A1131). The winning opening operation transition setting process 1 is terminated.

If the control pointer is “2” or “4” in step A1121, the processing number is set to “7” for processing 2 during the big prize opening opening (step A1132), and the processing number is set as the special game. Save in the process number area (step A1133).
Next, a wait time (for example, 1400 msec) for short closing (closing time is short) is set as the waiting time (closing time) after closing the big prize opening 2 (second special variable winning device 39). (Step A1134), the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A1135).
Next, in order to close the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the OFF data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning port 2 solenoid output data area (step A1136). The winning opening operation transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big prize opening operation transition setting process 2]
Next, the special prize opening operation transition setting process 2 (step A1108) in the special prize opening opening process 2 will be described.
In the big prize opening operation transition setting process 2, as shown in FIG. 65, first, a branch process (step A1141) is performed according to the control pointer (intermittent release control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4” in step A1141, the process number is set to “7” related to the special prize opening opening process 2 (step A1142). The number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1143).
Next, a wait time (for example, 1400 msec) for short closing (closing time is short) is set as the waiting time (closing time) after closing the big prize opening 2 (second special variable winning device 39). (Step A1144), the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A1145).
Next, in order to close the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the OFF data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning port 2 solenoid output data area (step A1146). The winning opening operation transition setting process 2 ends.

If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1141, the process number is set to “7” related to the special prize opening opening process 2 (step A1147). The number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1148).
Next, an opening time (for example, 1600 msec) for short opening (opening with a short opening time) is set (step A1149) using the special winning opening 2 (second special variable winning device 39) as an opening time (step A1149). The time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1150).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, ON data for turning on the large winning port solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning port 2 solenoid output data area (step A1151). The winning opening operation transition setting process 2 ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1010) in the special winning opening opening process will be described.
In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 66, first, the processing number is set to “5” relating to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A1161), and the processing number is designated as a special figure. Save in the game process number area (step A1162).
Next, the remaining ball processing time for the big winning opening 1 (for example, 1900 msec), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing of the big winning opening 1, is set (step A1163), and the remaining ball processing time is set as a special game processing timer. Save in the area (step A1164).
Next, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the OFF data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning port 1 solenoid output data area (step A1165). The winning ball remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball process transition setting process 2]
Next, the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process 2 (step A1116) in the special winning opening open process 2 will be described.
In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process 2, as shown in FIG. 67, first, the processing number is set to “5” relating to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A1171), and the processing number is specified. The game is saved in the figure game process number area (step A1172).
Next, a remaining ball processing time for the big prize opening 2 (for example, 1300 msec), which is a time required for the remaining ball processing of the big winning opening 2, is set (step A1173), and the remaining ball processing time is set as a special game processing timer. Save in the area (step A1174).
Next, in order to close the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the OFF data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning port 2 solenoid output data area (step A1175). The winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the winning prize remaining ball process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, the current round number (current round number) and the value of the RWM round number upper limit area (round number upper limit value) in the special gaming state being executed. ) To determine whether the upper limit has been reached (that is, whether the current round is the final round) (step A1201), and the current round (this round) in the special gaming state is the final round Whether or not (step A1202).

If it is determined in step A1202 that the current round is the final round (step A1202; Yes), an ending time table is set (step A1203), and the ending time corresponding to the symbol information is acquired (step A1204). ), And the ending time is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1205).
Next, a big hit end process transition setting process (step A1206) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A1202 that the current round is not the final round (step A1202; No), an interval time table is set (step A1207), which corresponds to the winning prize opening information and the current number of rounds. The interval time is acquired (step A1208), and the ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1209).
Next, the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1210) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1210) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described.
In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, as shown in FIG. 69, first, “3” related to the fanfare / interval process is set as a process number (step A1221), and the process number is designated as a special game. Save in the process number area (step A1222).
Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning award (special variable winning device 38, 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is OFF) is a test signal output data area. (Step A1223), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1206) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described.
In the jackpot end process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 70, first, “6” related to the jackpot end process is set as the process number (step A1231), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A1232).
Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning award (special variable winning device 38, 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is OFF) is a test signal output data area. (Step A1233).

Next, the information of the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is reset (step A1234), and the information of the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is reset (step A1235). Then, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is reset (step A1236).
Next, the information on the round number upper limit information area for storing the upper limit information on the number of rounds is reset (step A1237), and the information on the big winning opening release information area for storing the opening information on the big winning opening is reset (step A1237). A1238).
Next, the information of the intermittent release control pointer area for storing the intermittent release control pointer is reset (step A1239), and the information of the intermittent release control pointer upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the intermittent release control pointer is reset (step A1240). ), The jackpot end process transition setting process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the jackpot end process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the big hit end process, as shown in FIG. 71, first, a probability variation determination flag is loaded (step A1301), and branch processing is performed according to the loaded probability variation determination flag (step A1302).
Specifically, if the probability variation determination flag is “0” in step A1302, jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A1303) is performed, and if the probability variation determination flag is “1”, jackpot end setting processing is performed. 2 (step A1304), when the probability variation determination flag is “2”, jackpot end setting processing 3 (step A1305) is performed, and when the probability variation determination flag is “3”, jackpot end setting processing 4 ( Step A1306) is performed.

Next, a probability information command corresponding to the probability variation determination flag loaded in step A1301 is prepared (step A1307), and command setting processing (step A1308) is performed.
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1309) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the jackpot end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1303) in the above jackpot end process will be described.
In the jackpot end setting process 1, as shown in FIG. 72, first, a signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the signal for the jackpot 2 is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1321), and the start of the time reduction is set. Signal (for example, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, normal motor combination The object 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1322).

Then, the number of the time is saved in the game state display number area (step A1323), and the common figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the usual game mode flag area (step A1324).
Next, the low probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1325), and the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1326).
Next, the initial value of the time-varying variation number is saved in the time-varying variation number region (step A1327), and a signal related to right-handed (for example, the firing position designation signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data region (step A1328).
Next, the display number for turning on the right-handed notification LED (right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1329), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. .
By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1304) in the above jackpot end process will be described.
In the jackpot end setting process 2, as shown in FIG. 73, first, a signal related to the start of high probability (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1341), Signal related to start (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON, and normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) in the test signal output data area (step A1342).

Next, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A 1343), and the common figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A1344).
Next, the high probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1345), and the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1346).
Next, the time variation range is reset (step A1347), and a signal related to right-handedness (for example, the firing position designation signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1348).
Next, the display number for turning on the right-handed notification LED (the right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) is saved in the game state display number 2 region (step A1349), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. .
By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1305) in the above jackpot end process will be described.
In the big hit end setting process 3, as shown in FIG. 74, first, a signal related to the start of the latent probability change (the gaming state after the big hit game that shifts to the high probability state but does not notify it) (eg, the big hit two signal is turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A 1361), and a signal related to the start of the latent probability change (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON) is the test signal output data. Save in the area (step A 1362).

Next, the number at the time of the latent probability change is saved in the game state display number area (step A 1363), and the ordinary low probability & no ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A 1364).
Next, a high probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (step A1365), and a probability information command (latency probability change) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1366).
Next, the time variation range is reset (step A1367), and a signal related to the end of the right handing (for example, the firing position designation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1368).
Next, a display number for turning off the right-handed notification LED (right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) is saved in the game state display number 2 region (step A1369), and the big hit end setting process 3 is ended. .
With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state but does not become a time-short state. Further, after the special gaming state is finished, a latent state in which the probability state is not notified is generated.

[Big hit end setting process 4]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 4 (step A1306) in the above jackpot end process will be described.
In the jackpot end setting process 4, as shown in FIG. 75, first, a signal related to the low probability start (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1381). Signal related to start (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned OFF, and ordinary electric accessory 1 open extended state signal is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1382).

Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A1383), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A1384).
Next, a low probability & short timeless flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (step A1385), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1386).
Next, the time variation range is reset (step A1387), and a signal related to the end of the right handing (for example, the firing position designation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1388).
Next, a display number for turning off the right-handed notification LED (right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1389), and the big hit end setting process 4 is ended. .
With the above processing, after the special game state is completed, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and does not become the short-time state.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1309) in the above-described jackpot end process will be described.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, as shown in FIG. 76, first, the process number is set to “0” for the special figure normal process (step A1411), and the process number is set as the special figure game process number. Save in the area (step A1412).

Next, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1413). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, and the special symbol 1 signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1414).
Next, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is reset (step A1415), and the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is reset (step A1416).
Next, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1417), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1418). The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the small hit fanfare mid-process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the small hitting fanfare process, as shown in FIG. 77, first, it is checked whether or not the small hitting big prize opening release information is special figure 1 small hitting release information (step A1501). It is determined whether or not (step A1502).

If it is determined in step A1502 that the small hit big winning opening information is special figure 1 small hit release information (step A1502; Yes), a small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1503) is performed, The process during the hit fanfare is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A1502 that the small hit big winning opening information is not the special figure 1 small hit opening information (step A1502; No), that is, the small hit big winning opening information is the special figure 2 small hit opening information. If it is, the small hitting medium processing 2 shift setting process (step A1504) is performed, and the small hitting fanfare in-process is terminated.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, the process for setting processing for small hitting process (step A1503) in the above-described medium processing for small hitting fanfare will be described.
In the small hit / medium process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 78, first, “9” for the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is set in the special game process number area. (Step A1512).

Next, the opening time (for example, 1600 milliseconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set (step A1513), and the opening time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1514).
Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening 1 (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1515), and the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 is saved. In order to release, the ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening 1 solenoid output data area (step A1516).
Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winning winning prizes is reset (step A1517), and the small hit / medium process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small hit processing 2 transition setting processing]
Next, the small hitting process 2 transition setting process (step A1504) in the small hitting fanfare medium process will be described.
In the small hit / medium process 2 transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, first, “10” relating to the small hit / medium process 2 is set as a process number (step A1521), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1522).

Next, an opening time (for example, 1600 milliseconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set (step A1523), and the opening time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1524).
Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening 2 (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1525), and the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is saved. In order to release, the ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening 2 solenoid output data area (step A1526).
Next, the information on the area of the number-of-big-winner counts that stores the number of winning-outs for the big winning mouth is reset (step A1527), and the small hit / medium process 2 shift setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the small hitting process (step A19) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the small hitting process, as shown in FIG. 80, the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1601) is performed, and the small hitting process is terminated.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1601) in the small hit medium process will be described.
In the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 81, first, “11” relating to the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step A1611), and the process number is set as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1612).

Next, a small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1300 msec) for the big winning opening 1 which is a time required for the small winning remaining ball processing of the big winning opening 1 is set (step A1613), and the small hit remaining ball processing time is set. Is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1614).
Next, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, OFF data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning port 1 solenoid output data area (step A1615). The hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small hit processing 2]
Next, the middle hit process 2 (step A20) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the small hit middle processing 2, as shown in FIG. 82, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1701) is performed, and the small hit middle processing 2 is terminated.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process 2]
Next, the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process 2 (step A1701) in the small hit medium process 2 will be described.
In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing 2, as shown in FIG. 83, first, “11” relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as a processing number (step A1711), and the processing number is set as the special game. Save in the process number area (step A1712).

Next, a small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1300 milliseconds) for the big winning port 2 which is a time required for the small winning remaining ball processing of the big winning port 2 is set (step A1713), and the small hit remaining ball processing time is set. Is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1714).
Next, in order to close the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the OFF data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning port 2 solenoid output data area (step A1715). The winning remaining ball processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the small hit remaining ball process (step A21) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
In the small hit remaining sphere process, as shown in FIG. 84, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1801) is performed to end the small hit remaining sphere process.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1801) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described.
In the small hit end process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 85, first, “12” relating to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1811), and the process number is set in the special game process number area. (Step A1812).

Next, a small hitting ending time (for example, 16100 milliseconds) is set (step A1813), and the small hitting ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1814).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1815). The number of winning prizes is reset (step A1816).
Next, the small hit big winning opening release information area is reset (step A1817), and the small hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the small hit end process (step A22) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
In the small hit end process, as shown in FIG. 86, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1901) is performed, and the small hit end process ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1901) in the above-described small hit end process will be described.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 87, first, “0” relating to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1911), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. (Step A1912).

Next, a signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is turned OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1913), and a signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned OFF, The special symbol 2 small hit signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1914).
Next, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1915), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning prize 2 fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1916).
Next, the round LED pointer area storing the pointer value (address) of the small hitting round LED is reset (step A1917), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the normal game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In this normal game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall process related to the normal map variable display game is controlled, and the display of the normal map is set.

In the ordinary game process, as shown in FIG. 88, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a, and a general power prize switch monitoring for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a. Processing (step B2) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether the normal game processing timer has already timed up or timed up after -1 update (step B3), and it is determined whether or not the time has expired (step B4).

If it is determined in step B4 that the usual game process timer has not expired (step B4; No), the process proceeds to step B15.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the normal game process timer has expired (step B4; Yes), the normal game sequence branch table referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. Is set in the register (step B5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is obtained using the table (step B6).
Next, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the usual game process number.

In step B8, if the usual game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, the process during the usual figure fluctuation The usual process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the normal game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.
In step B8, if the normal game processing number is “2”, if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal electric power depending on whether or not the time is short, A general map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “3” in step B8, the normal game per-map process (such as setting of information necessary for continuing the normal game per-game process or executing the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process) ( Step B12) is performed.
If the ordinary game processing number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the termination process per ordinary diagram is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B8, the usual figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure normal process is performed.
Thereafter, various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 are prepared (step B15), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step B16) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 53 is performed. Go to finish the usual game process.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B21), and it is determined whether there is an input (step B22).

If it is determined in step B22 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B22; No), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B22 that there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B22; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a signal related to right-handing (whether the launch position designation signal is ON) (step S22). B23).
If it is determined in step B23 that there is a signal related to right-handed (step B23; Yes), that is, if the launch position designation signal is ON (right-handed), the process proceeds to step B26.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B23 that there is no right-handed signal (step B23; No), that is, if the firing position designation signal is OFF (left-handed), a right-handed warning start command is prepared ( Step B24), command setting processing (step B25) is performed, and the process proceeds to step B26. As a result, when a right-handed strike is detected even if it is not a right-handed period, a right-handed warning (display or voice output prompting to return to the left-handed) is executed.

In step B26, it is checked whether the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (step B26), and it is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (step B27).
If it is determined in step B27 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B27; No), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B27 that the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (step B27; Yes), the number of reserved drawings is updated by +1 (step B28), and the number of reserved maps after update is updated. The address of the random number saving area corresponding to is calculated (step B29).
Next, a winning random number is extracted and saved in a random number saving area of the RWM (step B30), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned general game process will be described.
In the general power winning switch monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 90, first, is the normal variable winning game 37 in a hit state and the normal variable winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations (per normal map)? It is checked (step B51), and it is determined whether or not the normal drawing is being reached (step B52).
If it is determined in step B52 that the normal map is not being reached (step B52; No), the general power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B52 that the normal map is being reached (step B52; Yes), it is checked whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B53), and it is determined whether there is an input. (Step B54).

If it is determined in step B54 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B54; No), the general power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B54 that there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B54; Yes), the count number of the general power counter is updated by +1 (step B55), and the updated general power counter is updated. It is checked whether the count number has reached an upper limit (for example, “6”) (step B56), and it is determined whether it has reached (step B57).
When it is determined in step B57 that the count number of the ordinary power counter has not reached the upper limit value (step B57; No), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B57 that the count value of the ordinary power counter has reached the upper limit value (step B57; Yes), the hit end pointer 4 (the hit end value) hits the process control pointer area during the normal figure. Is saved (step B58), the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B59), and the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the usual figure usual process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process is demonstrated.
In the usual figure routine processing, as shown in FIG. 91, first, it is checked whether the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B101), and it is determined whether or not the number of usual figure holds is “0”. (Step B102).
If it is determined in step B102 that the number of ordinary drawings held is “0” (step B102; Yes), the ordinary diagram normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B103) is performed, and the ordinary diagram ordinary processing is terminated. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending maps is not “0” (step B102; No), the probability of a hit result in the usual map variation display game is a normal probability (ie, a low probability of ordinary maps). ) (Step B104).

When it is determined in step B104 that the normal figure is at low probability (step B104; Yes), an upper limit determination value at the normal figure low probability is set (step B105), and the process proceeds to step B107.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B104 that the normal probability is not low (step B104; No), the upper limit determination value for the normal probability is set (step B106), and the process proceeds to step B107.
In Step B107, a random number is loaded from the random number saving area of the RWM (Step B107), and then a lower limit judgment value is set (Step B108).
Next, it is checked whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in Step B108 (Step B109), and it is determined whether it is less than the lower limit determination value (Step B110). In the case of the present embodiment, the upper limit determination value at the time of the normal figure low probability is “2”, the upper limit determination value at the normal figure high probability is “250”, and the lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, “1” and “2” are hit when the normal probability is low, and “1” to “250” are hit when the normal probability is high.

If it is determined in step B110 that the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step B110; No), it is checked whether the value of the hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value set in step B105 or B106 (step B110). B111), it is determined whether it is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B112).
When it is determined in step B112 that the value of the hit random number is not larger than the set upper limit determination value (step B112; No), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B113), and the normal figure stop symbol is hit. The stop symbol number at the time is set (step B114), and the process proceeds to step B117.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B110 that the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B110; Yes), or if it is determined in step B112 that the value of the hit random number is greater than the set upper limit determination value. In (Step B112; Yes), the off-line information is saved in the hit flag area (Step B115), the stop symbol number at the time of the shift is set in the normal symbol stop symbol (Step B116), and the process proceeds to Step B117.

In step B117, the winning random number save area is cleared to 0 (step B117), and then the stop symbol number is saved in the normal figure stop symbol area (step B118). 1 data signal is continuously output until the data value changes) in the test signal output data area (step B119).
Next, the hit random number save area is shifted (step B120), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B121), and the number of usual hold is updated by -1 (step B122). In other words, in accordance with the execution of the map change display game related to the oldest map hold 1, the process of raising the ranks of the map hold 2 to 4 that are held after the map hold 1 is performed one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the usual figure hold 2 to the usual figure hold 4 in the hit random number save area (for example, the hit random number) is moved from the usual figure hold 1 to the usual figure hold 3 in the hit random number save area. It becomes. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation 4 in the hit random number saving area is cleared and the number of usual figure reservations is decremented by one.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is in progress (during the short time state) (step B123).
If it is determined in step B123 that the power transmission support is not in progress (step B123; No), a variable time (for example, 10000 milliseconds) without the general power support is set (step B124), and the set variable time is set. Save in the usual game process timer area (step B126), perform a process change setting process during normal figure change (step B127), and end the usual figure routine process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B123 that the power transmission support is in progress (step B123; Yes), a fluctuation time (for example, 600 milliseconds) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B125), and the set fluctuation is set. The time is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B126), the normal process changing process transition setting process (step B127) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Usual map transition process 1]
Next, the normal map normal process transition setting process 1 (step B103) in the above-described normal map normal process and the normal map normal process shift setting process 1 (step B305) in the normal map display process described later will be described.
As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” relating to the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B131), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process number. Save in the area (step B132).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B133), and the normal chart normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, a process transition setting process (step B127) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 93, in the process for setting the change in the normal map process, first, “1” relating to the process in the normal map change is set as the process number (step B141), and the process number is set as the normal game process. Save in the number area (step B142).

Next, a signal related to the start of the general map change display game on the general map display 53 (for example, the normal symbol 1 change signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B143), and the general map change display game is displayed. A changing flag indicating that the change is in progress is saved in the normal change control flag area (step B144).
Next, the variable timer initial value (for example, 256 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the general-purpose indicator 53, is saved in the general-purpose variable control timer area (step B145), and the normal-fluctuation changing process transition setting is made. The process ends.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the process during normal map change (step B10) in the above-mentioned general game process will be described.
In the normal map changing process, as shown in FIG. 94, a normal map display process transition setting process (step B201) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the process for setting the process for displaying a normal map in the process for changing the normal map (step B201) will be described.
In the normal figure display process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 95, first, “2” related to the normal figure display process is set as the process number (step B211), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B212).

Next, a normal map display time (for example, 600 milliseconds), which is a display time of the result of the normal map variable display game on the general map display 53, is set (step B213). Save in the area (step B214).
Next, a signal related to the end of the normal change (for example, the normal signal 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B215), and a stop flag indicating that the normal change display game is stopped. Is saved in the usual figure variation control flag area (step B216), and the usual figure display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, a process for displaying a general map (step B11) in the general game process described above will be described.
In the process of displaying a normal map, as shown in FIG. 96, first, the hit flag set in the normal process is loaded (step B301), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B302).
Next, it is checked whether or not the loaded hit flag is a hit (step B303), and it is determined whether or not it is a hit (step B304).

If it is determined in step B304 that the hit flag is not a hit (step B304; No), the normal map normal process transition setting process 1 (step B305) for shifting to the normal chart normal process is performed, and the normal map is being displayed. The process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B304 that the hit flag is a win (step B304; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (during the time reduction state) (step B306).

  If it is determined in step B306 that the power transmission support is in progress (step B306; Yes), the power transmission open time (for example, 1700 milliseconds) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B307). "0" is set as the hit start pointer (control pointer) (step B308), and the hit start pointer is saved in the normal process control pointer area (step B311). Thereby, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 is two or more times.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B306 that the power transmission support is not in progress (step B306; No), a power transmission opening time (for example, 300 milliseconds) when there is no power transmission support is set (step B309). “4” is set as a hit start pointer (control pointer) when there is no support (step B310), and the hit start pointer is saved in the normal process control pointer area (step B311). As a result, the number of times that the normally variable winning device 37 is opened becomes one.
Next, the set normal power release time is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B312), a normal process transition setting process (step B313) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the process for setting a transition to a normal map in the process for displaying a normal map (step B313) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 97, in the normal process transition setting process, first, “3” for the normal process is set as the process number (step B321), and the process number is set as the normal game process. Save in the number area (step B322).
Next, a signal related to the start of the normal figure change display game in the general map display 53 (for example, a signal per normal symbol is turned on) and a signal related to the start of normal power operation (for example, a signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is turned on) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B323), and in order to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, ON data for turning on the general electric solenoid 37c is stored in the general electric solenoid output data area. Save (step B324).
The output data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is also output as a test signal relating to the opening of the ordinary electric (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 opening signal. ON when the solenoid 37c is ON) by branching the electric signal pattern. Is done.

Next, the information on the area for the general power count number that stores the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is reset (step B325), and the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the illegal winning number area is reset (step B326).
Next, a fraud monitoring out-of-period monitoring flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B327), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, a process for hitting a normal figure (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 98, in the process for the normal map, first, the value of the process control pointer area for the normal map (the process control pointer for the normal map) is loaded and prepared (step B401). It is checked whether the mid-process control pointer is a hit end pointer 4 (a hit end value) (step B402), and it is determined whether it is a hit end value (step B403).
If it is determined in step B403 that the middle processing control pointer per normal drawing is not the hit end value (step B403; No), the value of the middle processing control pointer area per normal drawing is updated by +1 (step B404). An electric operation transition setting process (step B405) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B403 that the process control pointer during the normal map is a hit end value (step B403; Yes), the general electric operation transition setting process (step B405) is performed to End the middle process.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the general electric operation transition setting process (step B405) in the above-described normal process will be described. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

In the general electric operation transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 99, first, a branch process is performed in accordance with the control pointer (general processing control pointer per normal figure) (step B411).
If the control pointer is “0” or “2” in step B411, a wait time (for example, 600 msec) after closing the normal variable winning device 37 is set (step B412), and the wait time is set to normal. The game is saved in the figure game processing timer area (step B413).
Next, in order to close the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, the OFF data for turning off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B414), and the ordinary electric operation transition setting process is performed. Exit.

If the control pointer is “1” or “3” in step B411, a normal power release time (for example, 1400 milliseconds) at the time of normal power support is set (step B415), and the normal power open time is set to the normal power supply open time. The game is saved in the figure game processing timer area (step B416).
Next, in order to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B417), and the general power operation transition setting process is performed. Exit.

If the control pointer is “4” in step B411, “4” for the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is set as the process number (step B418), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B419).
Next, a normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 milliseconds) is set (step B420), and the normal power remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B321).
Next, in order to close the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, the OFF data for turning off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B422), and the ordinary electric operation transition setting process is performed. Exit.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the ordinary power remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described.
In the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, as shown in FIG. 100, the ordinary electric ball end process shift setting process (step B501) is performed, and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is ended.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the common figure ending process transition setting process (step B501) in the above-described ordinary train remaining teaching process will be described.
In the normal figure end process transition setting process, as shown in FIG. 101, first, “5” related to the general figure end process is set as the process number (step B511), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B512).

Next, an ending time (for example, 100 ms) of the usual game display game is set (step B513), and the usual ending time is saved in the usual game process timer area (step B514).
Next, a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B515), and the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is determined. Is reset (step B516).
Next, the normal processing control pointer area is reset (step B517), and the normal processing end processing transition setting processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the usual figure end process (step B14) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described.
In the usual figure end process, as shown in FIG. 102, the usual figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B601) is performed, and the usual figure end process is ended.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the normal map normal process transition setting process 2 (step B601) in the above-described normal map end process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 103, in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” relating to the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B611), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process number. Save in the area (step B612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal symbol per signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B613), and a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is set. (Flag monitoring period flag) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B614), and the normal-day normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In this segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display section 54, the special figure 2 hold display section 55, the general figure hold display section 56, the first gaming state display 57, the second gaming state provided in the collective display device 50 are provided. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the display 58, the third gaming state display 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

In the segment LED editing process, as shown in FIG. 104, first, the display control timer is updated by +1 (step C101), and it is checked whether the display control timer is output on timing (step C102). It is determined whether or not there is (step C103).
If it is determined in step C103 that the output is on (step C103; Yes), the lighting pointer is set as the blinking control pointer (step C104), and the process proceeds to step C106.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C103 that the output is not on (step C103; No), the extinguishing pointer is set as the blinking control pointer (step C105), and the process proceeds to step C106.
Here, whether or not it is the output on timing is to monitor the state of a specific bit (for example, bit 5) of the display control timer, and if this monitored bit is “1”, it is the output on timing. On the other hand, if the monitored bit is “0”, it is determined that it is not the output on timing. Therefore, the flashing is 128 milliseconds.

In step C106, the display data corresponding to the number of pending maps and the blinking control pointer set in step C104 or C105 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the pending map display 56 (step C106). Display data corresponding to the number of holds in FIG. 1 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display unit 54 (step C107).
Next, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display unit 55 (step C108), and display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and round display is performed. Save in the segment area of the unit 60 (step C109), obtain display data corresponding to the game state display number, and save it in the segment area of the first game state display 57 or the second game state display 58 (step S109) C110).

Next, a high-probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high-probability state at the time of power failure recovery is checked (step C111), and it is determined whether it is time to notify the high probability (step C111). C112).
If it is determined in step C112 that it is not time to notify the high probability (step C112; No), the OFF data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display 59 (step S112). C113), the segment LED editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C112 that it is the timing for notifying the high probability (step C112; Yes), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 105, first, the state of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked (step C201), and it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor 61 is ON (step C202). .
If it is determined in step C202 that the magnetic sensor 61 is not ON (step C202; No), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C203), and the process proceeds to step C210.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C202 that the magnetic sensor 61 is ON (step C202; Yes), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is updated by +1 and it is checked whether the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step C204), it is determined whether the time is up (step C205).

If it is determined in step C205 that the magnet fraud monitoring timer has expired (step C205; Yes), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C206), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is set in the magnet fraud notification timer area. (Step C207).
Next, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C208), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is set as a magnet fraud flag (step C209), and the process proceeds to step C214.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C205 that the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step C205; No), the process proceeds to step C210.

In Step C210, it is checked whether the magnet fraud notification timer has already timed up or timed up after -1 update (Step C210), and it is determined whether or not the time has expired (Step C211). It should be noted that the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” when the magnet fraud occurrence is not being reported, that is, the time is up.
If it is determined in step C211 that the magnet fraud notification timer has not expired (step C211; No), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C211 that the magnet fraud notification timer has expired (step C211; Yes), a magnet fraud notification end command is prepared (step C212), and a magnet fraud release flag is set as the magnet fraud flag. (Step C213), the process proceeds to Step C214.

In step C214, the magnet fraud flag set in step C209 or C213 is compared with the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C214), and it is determined whether or not they match (step C215).
If it is determined in step C215 that the magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C215; Yes), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C215 that the magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C215; No), the magnet fraud flag set in step C209 or C213 is saved in the magnet fraud flag area. (Step C216), command setting processing (Step C217) is performed, and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is “8”, it is determined that the time is up in Step C205. Therefore, since sensing is 4 milliseconds, the magnet improper notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved 32 milliseconds after the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, and after that, while the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, The magnetic fraud monitoring timer expires every 32 milliseconds and the magnetic fraud notification timer returns to the initial value. Therefore, the magnet fraud is reported while the magnetic sensor 61 is ON (except for the first 32 milliseconds) and for about 60 seconds after the magnetic sensor 61 is turned OFF. That is, as long as the magnetic sensor 61 is ON, the notification is continued.

[External information editing process]
Next, the external information editing process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In this external information editing process, an external device such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device or a test firing test is performed based on the monitoring result of the winning mouth switch / error monitoring process (step S107) or the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111). Creates information to be output to the apparatus and sets it in the output buffer.

In the external information editing process, as shown in FIG. 106, first, the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step C301), and the door / frame open / security signal OFF is performed. Data is set (step C302).
Next, it is checked whether the security signal control timer has already timed up or timed up after -1 update (step C303), and it is determined whether or not the time has expired (step C304).
If it is determined in step C304 that the security signal control timer has expired (step C304; Yes), the door / frame opening / security signal set in step C302 is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S304). C306).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C304 that the security signal control timer has not expired (step C304; No), the door / frame opening / security signal ON data is set (step C305) and set. The door / frame opening / security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C306).

Next, it is checked whether an error has occurred in the status of the front frame (glass frame 15) opening monitoring area (step C307), and it is determined whether an error has occurred (step C308).
If it is determined in step C308 that the status of the opening monitoring area of the front frame (glass frame 15) is not in error (step C308; No), the status of the opening monitoring area of the gaming frame (front frame 12) is in error. Is checked (step C309), and it is determined whether an error is occurring (step C310).
If it is determined in step C310 that the status of the game frame (front frame 12) release monitoring area is not in error (step C310; No), it is checked whether the value of the big prize opening 1 illegal flag area is an illegal prize occurrence flag. Then (step C311), it is determined whether fraud is occurring (that is, whether it is an illegal winning flag) (step C312).
If it is determined in step C312 that fraud has not occurred (step C312; No), that is, if the value of the big prize opening 1 fraud flag area is not the fraudulent prize occurrence flag, the value of the big prize mouth 2 fraud flag area is A check is made as to whether or not an illegal prize has occurred (step C313), and it is determined whether or not an illegal prize has occurred (that is, whether or not an illegal prize has occurred) (step C314).
If it is determined in step C314 that fraud has not occurred (step C314; No), that is, if the value of the big prize opening 2 fraud flag area is not the fraud win occurrence flag, the value in the general electric fraud flag area is fraudulent. It is checked whether the flag is generated (step C315), and it is determined whether fraud is occurring (that is, whether it is a fraudulent winning flag) (step C316).
If it is determined in step C316 that no fraud has occurred (step C316; No), that is, if the value of the ordinary power fraud flag region is not the fraudulent winning flag, whether the value of the magnet fraud flag region is the magnet fraud flag It is checked (step C317) and it is determined whether fraud is occurring (that is, whether it is a magnet fraud occurrence flag) (step C318).
If it is determined in step C318 that fraud has not occurred (step C318; No), that is, if the value of the magnet fraud flag region is not the magnet fraud flag, the process proceeds to step C321.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step C308 or step C310 that an error has occurred (step C308; Yes or step C310; Yes), or an illegality has occurred in step C312, step C314, step C316, or step C318. (Step C312; Yes, step C314; Yes, step C316, or step C318; Yes), the ON data of the door / frame opening / security signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C319), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step C320), and the process proceeds to step C321.

In step C321, a start port signal editing process (step C321) for editing the winning signal of the start port is performed, and thereafter the OFF data of the symbol determination number signal is set (step C322), and the symbol determination number signal control timer has already been set. It is checked whether the time is up or after the -1 update (step C323), and it is determined whether the time is up (step C324).
If it is determined in step C324 that the symbol determination number signal control timer has expired (step C324; Yes), the symbol determination number signal set in step C322 is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S324). C326), the external information editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C324 that the symbol determination number signal control timer has not expired (step C324; No), the ON data of the symbol determination number signal is set (step C325), and the set symbol determination is performed. The count signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C326), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, the start port signal editing process (step C321) in the external information editing process described above will be described. This start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

In the start port signal editing process, as shown in FIG. 107, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step C331), and the start port signal output control timer is timed up. Is checked (step C332), and it is determined whether the time is up (step C333).
When it is determined in step C333 that the start port signal output control timer has timed out (step C333; Yes), that is, when the start port signal output control timer is “0”, the start port signal output count is “0”. It is checked whether it is “0” (step C334), and it is determined whether it is “0” (step C335).
In Step C335, when it is determined that the number of start port signal outputs is not “0” (Step C335; No), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (Step C336), and the start port signal output control timer area is updated. As the start port signal output control timer initial value, a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 milliseconds) is saved (step C337), and the process proceeds to step C340.

If it is determined in step C333 that the start port signal output control timer has not expired (step C333; No), that is, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", the start port signal output is performed. It is checked whether the control timer is in the output ON period (step C338) and it is determined whether it is in the output ON period (step C339). In the case of the present embodiment, when the start port signal output control timer is longer than 64 milliseconds, it is determined that the output is on.
If it is determined in step C339 that the output is ON (step C339; Yes), the process proceeds to step C340.
In step C340, ON data of the start port signal is set (step C340), and then the set start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C341), and the external information editing process is terminated.
Further, when it is determined in step C335 that the start port signal output count is “0” (step C335; Yes), or when it is determined in step C339 that it is not in the output ON section (step C339; No). Then, the start port signal OFF data is set (step C342), the set start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C341), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Command setting processing]
Next, each command setting process executed during the above-described timer interrupt process will be described.
In the command setting process, as shown in FIG. 108, first, the write counter that defines the buffer writing location is updated (step C401). In the present embodiment, the write counter is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “31”.
Next, the upper 1 byte command of the 2-byte commands is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter (step C402), and 2 bytes are stored in the command transmission area (ACTION) corresponding to the write counter. The lower 1 byte command is saved (step C403), and the command setting process is terminated.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the symbol fluctuation control process (steps A24 and A26) in the above-described special-figure game process and the symbol fluctuation control process (step B16) in the aforementioned normal game process will be described. This symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols.
In the symbol variation control process, as shown in FIG. 109, first, the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing. Is checked (step C501), and it is determined whether or not it is changing (step C502). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the variation control flag area is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A23, step A25, and step B15.

If it is determined in step C502 that the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step C502; Yes), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step S502). C503). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in Step A23, Step A25, and Step B15.
Next, the variation timer for the symbol to be controlled is updated by −1, it is checked whether the variation timer has timed up (step C504), and it is determined whether the time has expired (step C505). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the variation timer area is defined on the symbol display table (for variation) acquired in step C503.
If it is determined in step C505 that the variation timer has expired (step C505; Yes), the symbol variation control timer initial value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved in the variation timer area to be controlled (step C506).
Next, the variable symbol number relating to the symbol to be controlled is updated (step C507). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the variation symbol number area is defined on the symbol display table (for variation) acquired in step C503.
Next, the value of the control target variable symbol number (updated variable symbol number) area is loaded as a display symbol pointer (step C508), and the process proceeds to step C511.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C505 that the variation timer has not expired (step C505; No), the variation symbol number to be controlled as the display symbol pointer (variation not updated in the updating process in step C507) The value of the symbol number) area is loaded (step C508), and the process proceeds to step C511.

If it is determined in step C502 that the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step C502; No), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired ( Step C509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A23, step A25, and step B15.
Next, the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is loaded as a display symbol pointer (step C510), and the process proceeds to step C511. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the stop symbol number area is defined on the symbol display table (for stop) acquired in step C509.
In step C511, display data corresponding to the display symbol pointer is acquired (step C511). In the case of the present embodiment, display data is defined for the number of variable symbol numbers on the symbol display table (for variation) acquired in step C503, and the symbol display table (stop) acquired in step C509. The display data is defined by the number of stop symbol numbers.
Next, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area related to the control target symbol (step C512), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the segment area is defined on the symbol display table (for fluctuation) acquired in step C503 or on the symbol display table (for stoppage) acquired in step C509.
Thereby, among the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53, the symbol corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the display to be controlled.
In the process of updating (+1) the variable symbol number performed in step C507, 0 is cleared when the variable symbol number exceeds the upper limit value, and is sequentially updated between the variable symbol number 0 and the upper limit value. (+1) is performed.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the distribution process (step A470) in the above-described second half variation pattern setting process and the distribution process (step A492) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described. In this distribution process, the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from (first half variation pattern group).

In the sorting process, as shown in FIG. 110, first, at the head of the target selection table (the latter half variation selection table prepared in the second half variation pattern setting process or the first half variation selection table prepared in the variation pattern setting process). It is checked whether the data is a code without distribution (step C601), and it is determined whether the data is a code without distribution (step C602).
Here, in the same way as the variation group selection table, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern or first half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “00h”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined in step C602 that the top data of the target selection table is a code without distribution (step C602; Yes), the data is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step C603). The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C602 that the top data of the target selection table is not a code without distribution (step C602; No), the target variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 2 or variation pattern random number) is selected as the selected value. 3) is loaded (step C604), and one distribution value first defined in the target selection table is acquired (step C605).

Next, a new selection value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step C605 from the selection value loaded in Step C604 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step C606). It is determined whether or not the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C607).
If it is determined in step C607 that the new selection value is not smaller than “0” (step C607; No), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step C608), and the process returns to step C605.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (step C605), and then the new selection value determined in the previous processing in step C607 is distributed as the selection value. A new selection value is calculated by subtracting the value (step C606), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C607).
This process is executed until it is determined in step C607 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C607; Yes). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table.
If it is determined in step C607 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C607; Yes), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step C603), and the distribution process is performed. Exit.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the 2-byte distribution process (step A467) in the above-described latter half variation pattern setting process will be described. This 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation pattern group of the special figure variation display game from the variation group selection table such as the loss variation pattern selection table or the jackpot variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number 1. is there.

In the 2-byte distribution process, as shown in FIG. 111, first, it is checked whether the top data of the selection table (the fluctuation group selection table prepared in the second half fluctuation pattern setting process) is a code without distribution (step C701), it is determined whether or not the code is an unallocated code (step C702).
Here, the variation group selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter-half variation pattern group, but the variation defining only the latter-half variation pattern group in which the latter-half variation pattern is “no reach”. In the group selection table (for example, in the deviation variation pattern selection table, since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0000h”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined in step C702 that the top data of the variation group selection table is a code without distribution (step C702; Yes), the data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step C703). The 2-byte sorting process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C702 that the top data in the variation group selection table is not a code without distribution (step C702; No), the target variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1) is loaded as a selection value. (Step C704), the first distribution value specified in the variation group selection table is acquired (Step C705).

Next, the distribution value acquired in step C705 is subtracted from the selection value loaded in step C704 to calculate a new selection value (step C706), and whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0”. (Step C707).
If it is determined in step C707 that the new selection value is not smaller than “0” (step C707; No), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step C708), and the process returns to step C705. .

That is, the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired (step C705), and then the distribution value is subtracted using the new selection value determined in the process of the previous step C707 as the selection value. Then, a new selection value is calculated (step C706), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C707).
This process is executed until it is determined in step C707 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C707; Yes). As a result, one of the latter-half variation pattern groups is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern group defined in the variation group selection table.
If it is determined in step C707 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C707; Yes), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step C703), and 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

Here, the lighting timing of the right-handed notification LED (right-handed notification unit provided in the collective display device 50) will be described.
FIG. 112 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the lighting timing of the right-handed notification LED.
At the start of the special gaming state (at the start of the big hit fanfare), the right-handed notification LED starts to turn on and the launch position designation signal is turned ON.
And when the conditions for ending ordinary power support (short-time state) are met (for example, after the end of jackpot (end of special gaming state), when the specified number of fluctuations has ended, or when the short-time state does not occur after the end When the right end notification LED is turned on, the launch position designation signal is turned OFF.
In addition, when it is detected that the game ball has passed to the normal start gate 34 during a period other than the period from when the right-hand-notification LED is turned on to when it is finished (except during small hits that occur during normal times). Performs a right-handed warning (display or sound output prompting to return to the left-handed).

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. Control processing by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes main processing shown in FIG. 113 and timer interrupt processing performed at a predetermined time period.

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 113, the process at the start of the program is first performed.
In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step D1), the CPU is initialized (step D2), and the VDP 312 is initialized (step D3).
Next, an interrupt is permitted (step D4), display data generation is permitted (step D5), a random number seed is set (step D6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step D6). Step D7).

In the main processing, next, loop processing is performed as main loop processing.
In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step D8), and an effect button input process (step D9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. . The input from the effect button 25 is read in the timer interrupt process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, a process of changing the effect content is performed.
Next, a random number update process (step D10) for updating a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game, a voice recognition command check process (step D11) for checking a command from the voice recognition unit 80, and a tactile operation The tactile operation monitoring process (step D12) for monitoring the input from the unit 90 is performed. The input from the haptic operation unit 90 is read in a timer interruption process (specifically, the tactile detection sensor input interruption process shown in FIG. 123). In this haptic operation monitoring process, there is an input from the haptic operation part 90. At the same time, processing for increasing / decreasing growth points (described later) is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step D13) and an effect display edit process (step D14) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 are performed, and a drawing command preparation end is set (step D15). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.
Next, it is determined whether it is frame switching timing (step D16). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching).
If it is determined in step D16 that it is not the frame switching timing (step D16; No), step D16 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D16 that it is the frame switching timing (step D16; Yes), screen drawing is instructed (step D17).

  Next, a sound control process (step D18) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (speakers 19a, 19b, etc.), a decoration control process (step D19) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18, A movable body control process (step D20) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to step D8.

[Voice recognition command check processing]
Next, the voice recognition command check process (step D11) in the main process by the effect control apparatus 300 (main control microcomputer 311) will be described.
In the voice recognition command check process, as shown in FIG. 114, it is first determined whether or not a voice recognition command has been received from the voice recognition unit 80 (step D101).

If it is determined in step D101 that no voice recognition command has been received (step D101; No), the voice recognition command check process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D101 that a voice recognition command has been received (step D101; Yes), the voice recognition command is received from the voice recognition command reception buffer that temporarily stores the voice recognition command from the voice recognition unit 80. The voice recognition command analysis process (step D103) for analyzing the loaded voice recognition command is performed (step D102), and the voice recognition command check process is terminated.

[Voice recognition command analysis processing]
Next, the voice recognition command analysis process (step D103) in the voice recognition command check process described above will be described.
In the speech recognition command analysis process, as shown in FIG. 115, first, the contents of the speech (input speech number) and the language type (input language type) are extracted from the command data (speech recognition command) loaded in step D102. (Step D111).

  Here, for example, the voice recognition unit 80 according to the present embodiment performs predetermined voice recognition processing on the sound collected by the microphone 80a (player's voice, etc.) and creates player sound data corresponding to the sound. Then, the created player sound data is matched with the registered sound data registered in advance in the voice recognition unit 80. When there is registered sound data that matches the created player sound data, the input speech number and the input language type corresponding to the registered sound data to be matched are acquired, and the acquired input speech number and input language are acquired. The voice recognition command including the type is output to the effect control device 300 (specifically, the main control microcomputer 311). It is assumed that the speech recognition unit 80 stores in advance an input speech number / language type table (see FIG. 116) that stores registered sound data, and corresponding input speech numbers and input language types.

In other words, the voice recognition unit 80 is capable of recognizing the contents of the voice uttered by the player and generating voice recognition information (voice recognition command) including the contents information (input serif number) regarding the recognized contents. Make.
The voice recognition means (speech recognition unit 80) recognizes the language type of the voice uttered by the player, and uses the language type information (input language type) related to the recognized language type as voice recognition information (voice recognition command). It is possible to generate information including.

Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the speech (input speech number) extracted in step D111 is in the normal range (step D112).
Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the speech recognition unit 80 stores the input speech number / language type table shown in FIG. 116, and the effect control device 300 receives the input speech extracted in step D111 in step D112. It is determined whether or not the number is within the range of the input serif number stored in the input serif number / language type table (in the case of this embodiment, within the range of “1” to “27”). When the input speech number extracted in step D111 is any one of “1” to “27”, it is determined that the input speech number is in the normal range, and the input speech number extracted in step D111 is garbled. , “1” to “27” are not within the normal range. Of course, the input serif number / language type table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 116, and can be arbitrarily changed.

If it is determined in step D112 that the extracted serif content (input serif number) is not in the normal range (step D112; No), the voice recognition command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D112 that the extracted serif content (input serif number) is in the normal range (step D112; Yes), the language type (input language type) extracted in step D111 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not there is (step D113).
Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the effect control apparatus 300, in step D113, the input language type extracted in step D111 is stored in the input speech number / language type table (see FIG. 116). (In the case of the present embodiment, within the range of “A” to “C”). Then, when the input language type extracted in step D111 is any one of “A” to “C”, it is determined that it is in the normal range, and the input language type extracted in step D111 is garbled or the like. , “A” to “C” are not within the normal range.

If it is determined in step D113 that the extracted language type (input language type) is not in the normal range (step D113; No), the voice recognition command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D113 that the extracted language type (input language type) is within the normal range (step D113; Yes), the content of the speech (input speech number) extracted in step D111 is the current game. It is determined whether or not the content is valid in the state (step D114).

In the case of this embodiment, for example, the content of the speech (input speech number) extracted in step D111 is “6 probability change?”, And the current gaming state is other than the latent mode (the mode in which the probability state is not clearly notified). If the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (low probability state), for example, the line content is “20 Wow”, and the current gaming state is a predetermined time from the missed reach notification When the state is other than the above, the content of the speech is determined not to be valid speech content.
In addition, the “current game state” in the voice recognition command analysis process may include various states in addition to the presence / absence of a special game state, the presence / absence of a short-time state, and a probability state. For example, a state in which a response effect (such as outputting a response sound or displaying a response image) for a player's voice may be included. In the case of the present embodiment, when the current game state is a state in which a response effect is being performed, regardless of the speech content (input speech number) extracted in step D111, the speech content is not valid speech content. It is comprised so that it may determine.

If it is determined in step D114 that the extracted speech content (input speech number) is not valid speech content in the current gaming state (step D114; No), the speech recognition command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D114 that the extracted speech content (input speech number) is valid speech content in the current gaming state (step D114; Yes), the content of the speech (input speech number) is played. Is saved in the content area of the user's speech (step D115).

Next, it is determined whether or not the language type (input language type) extracted in step D111 is a language type that does not suffer from the words (step D116).
For example, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116, the language types of the normal range are “A (standard language)”, “B (Kansai dialect)”, and “C (English)”. And “A (standard language)” and “B (Kansai dialect)” are “3 good evening”, “5 happy”, “6 probable?”, “8 left?”, “9 right?”, “11 “Hot?”, “12 Expectation?”, “13 Cute”, “20 Wow”, “23 Chee”, “24 Ea”, “25 Yah”, “26 Lucky”, and “ 27 Great ”. That is, these lines are common lines between “A (standard word)” and “B (Kansai dialect)”. On the other hand, “C (English)” is not covered by both “A (standard language)” and “B (Kansai dialect)”. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, when the input language type extracted in step D111 is “C (English)”, it is determined that the language type does not suffer from the speech, and the input language type extracted in step D111. Is “A (standard language)” or “B (Kansai dialect)”, it is determined that the language type does not suffer from the words.

If it is determined in step D116 that the extracted language type (input language type) is a language type not subject to the speech (step D116; Yes), the language type (input language type) is set in the player language type area. (Step D118), and the process proceeds to step D119.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D116 that the extracted language type (input language type) is not a language type not subject to the speech (step D116; No), the content of the speech extracted in step D111 (input speech number) It is determined whether or not the line corresponding to is a line common to the language types (step D117).

  As described above, in the case of this embodiment, “3 good evening”, “5 happy”, “6 probable change?”, “8 left?”, “9 right?”, “11 hot?”, “12 expectations are ?, "13 Cute", "20 Wow", "23 Chee", "24 Ea", "25 Yata", "26 Lucky", and "27 Amazing" have the language type "A (Standard language) "and" B (Kansai dialect) "are common lines (see FIG. 116). That is, these lines are the same lines except for the intonation between the language types “A (standard language)” and “B (Kansai dialect)”. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the lines (input line numbers) extracted in step D111 are “3”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “11”, “12”. , “13”, “20”, “23”, “24”, “25”, “26”, and “27”, it is determined that it is a common line, and when it is not any It is determined that it is not a common line.

If it is determined in step D117 that the speech corresponding to the extracted speech content (input speech number) is not a common speech between language types (step D117; No), the language type (input language) extracted in step D111. (Type) is saved in the player language type area (step D118), and the process proceeds to step D119.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D117 that the speech corresponding to the extracted speech content (input speech number) is a common speech between language types (step D117; Yes), the language type extracted in step D111. The process proceeds to step D119 without saving (input language type) in the player language type area.
Therefore, if the line corresponding to the extracted line content (input line number) is a common line between language types, the input line number saved this time in the player line content area or the line type already stored in the player language type area Using the stored input language type (for example, the input language type saved in the player language type area in the previous speech recognition command analysis process) or the like, the response speech content is selected (step D119 described later), etc. A response effect for the voice of the player is performed.

It is assumed that a predetermined language type (for example, “A (standard language)”) is set as default in the player language type area. This predetermined language type may be selected in advance by the game store.
In addition, when a common line between the language types is input to the microphone 80a, the speech recognition unit 80 cannot recognize (determine) the language type, and therefore, a predetermined language type (for example, “A (Standard word) ")" is transmitted to the production control device 300.

  If the speech recognition unit 80 cannot recognize the language type (including the case where a common line between the language types is input to the microphone 80a), if the speech content can be recognized, the speech recognition unit 80 will input the input speech number together with the input speech number. For example, “Z (cannot be recognized)” is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the language type. Then, the production control device 300, when the speech content (input speech number) is in the normal range and the language type (input language type) is not in the normal range but is “Z (cannot be recognized)”, the speech content. Processing for saving (input serif number) in the player serif content area (step D115) is performed, and processing for saving the language type (input language type) in the player language type area (step D118) is omitted, and the response serif is omitted. You may comprise so that the process after the process (step D119) of selecting a content may be performed. In this case as well, the response speech content is selected (step D119 described later) using the input speech number currently saved in the player speech content region, the input language type already stored in the player language type region, and the like. Thus, a response effect for the player's voice is performed.

  That is, if the voice recognition means (speech recognition unit 80) cannot recognize the speech language type, the control means (production control device 300 in the case of the present embodiment) uses voice recognition information (voice Content information (input speech content) related to the content of the speech included in the recognition command) and language type information (input language type) included in the speech recognition information (speech recognition command) generated before the speech recognition information And the production corresponding to the is executed.

In step D119, the response content (input speech number) stored in the player speech content area, the language type (input language type) stored in the player language type region, the current game state, etc. The contents are selected (step D119).
Here, in the case of this embodiment, the production control device 300 stores the output serif number / language type table shown in FIG. Of course, the output serif number / language type table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 117, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Then, in step D119, the production control device 300, from the line contents (output line numbers) stored in the output line number / language type table, the line contents (input lines) stored in the player line content area. Is selected from the language type (output language type) stored in the output line number / language type table and stored in the player language type area. Select the same language type (output language type) as the language type (input language type).
In addition, when the dialogue content (input dialogue number) stored in the player dialogue content area is a dialogue content regarding a game guidance question (game inquiry), the corresponding dialogue content (output dialogue number) is the current game. Since it varies depending on the status, the content of the speech (input speech number) stored in the player speech content area from the content of the speech (number of output speech) stored in the output speech number / language type table and the current The line content (output line number) corresponding to the game state is selected, and the language type (output language type) stored in the output line number / language type table is stored in the player language type area. Select the same language type (output language type) as the existing language type (input language type).

FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 show an example of the correspondence relationship between the contents of player lines (input line numbers) and the contents of response lines (output lines numbers) in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 118, the input speech number stored in the player speech content area is “1”, and the input language type stored in the player language type area is “A (standard word)”. In this case, that is, when the voice “Good morning” is input to the microphone 80a, the production control device 300 selects “1” from the output speech numbers stored in the output speech number / language type table as the response speech content. ”,“ 4 ”, and“ 5 ”are selected at random, and“ A (standard word) ”is selected from the output language types stored in the output line number / language type table. select. As a result, any one of “Good morning”, “I met you again”, and “Thank you always” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as a reply voice.

As shown in FIG. 118, the input speech number stored in the player speech content area is “6”, and the input language type stored in the player language type area is “A (standard language)”. In other words, when the sound “probability change?” Is input to the microphone 80a and the current gaming state is “others”, that is, when not in the “latent mode”, the effect control device 300 As the response line contents, one of “14” and “22” is randomly selected from the output line numbers stored in the output line number / language type table, and the output line number / language is selected. “A (standard language)” is selected from the output language types stored in the type table. As a result, “Adorable” or “Good feeling” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as the reply voice.
Note that the output serif number selection rate may vary depending on the current probability state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 119, the input speech number stored in the player speech content area is “20”, “21”, “22”, “23”, or “24”, and the player language type When the input language type stored in the area is “A (standard language)”, that is, “Wow”, “Nandayo”, “Why”, “Che” or “Eh” Is input to the microphone 80a, and the current game state is "when promotion failure effect at the time of loss of reach (effect executed when the revival hit is not made after the loss of special reach)" The production control device 300 selects “34”, “35”, “36”, “37”, and “39” from the output speech numbers stored in the output speech number / language type table as response speech contents. Any one of While selected randomly, select "A (Standard Language)" from the output language type stored in the output speech number, language type table. As a result, “Next I'll do my best”, “I'm sorry”, “Forgive”, “A little more”, or “I was ugly” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as response voices.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the input speech number stored in the player speech content area is “25”, “26”, or “27”, and the input language stored in the player language type area. When the type is “A (standard language)”, that is, when the voice “Ya-ta”, “Lucky”, or “Wow” is input to the microphone 80a, In the case of “at the time of a round promotion effect during the jackpot round game (an effect that suggests an increase in the number of rounds)”, the effect control device 300 is stored in the output speech number / language type table as the response speech content. One of “7”, “8”, and “9” is randomly selected from the output serif numbers, and the output words stored in the output serif number / language type table. Select "A (standard language)" from the category. As a result, “good”, “congratulations”, or “done” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as response voices.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of output serif numbers that can be selected as response serif contents, the configuration is such that the output serif number selection rate varies according to a predetermined condition (for example, the current probability state or whether or not a hit occurs). It is also possible to do. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is “big hit”, the probability that the output line number of a highly reliable line is selected is increased, and the game result is “ During the execution of the special figure variation display game that is “out of”, the probability that the output line number of the line with high reliability is selected may be lowered.

Next, the voice output number corresponding to the response line content selected in step D119 is set (step D120).
Specifically, for example, when the output speech number “1” is selected as the response speech content and the output language type “A” is selected, the performance control device 300 selects “1-A” as the audio output number. Set. As a result, in the sound control process (step D18) in the main process described above, the voice “Good morning” corresponding to the voice output number “1-A” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as the reply voice.

Next, it is determined whether or not the response line content selected in step D119 is the response line content with screen drawing (step D121).
In the case of the present embodiment, when the effect control device 300 stores in the effect control device 300 image data for displaying an image corresponding to the response speech content on the display device 41 or the like, the response speech content is When it is determined that it is a response line with screen drawing and the image data for displaying an image corresponding to the response line content on the display device 41 or the like is not stored in the effect control device 300, the response line content is It is determined that it is not a response line with screen drawing.
If it is determined in step D121 that the selected response line content is not the response line content with screen drawing (step D121; No), the voice recognition command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D121 that the selected response speech content is the response speech content with screen drawing (step D121; Yes), an image for displaying an image corresponding to the selected response speech content. Based on the data, drawing of a response image corresponding to the selected response line content is set (step D122), and the voice recognition command analysis process is terminated.
As a result, in the process for instructing screen drawing in the main process described above (step D17), the acquired image data (that is, the image corresponding to the content of the response line selected in step D119) is displayed as the response image. An image based on (image data) is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

As a result, when the player utters “probability?”, For example, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), “chance may” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as a response sound and as a response image. A character image (in the case of the present embodiment, a horse image) and a balloon image “chance may” are displayed on the display device 41 or the like.
If the player utters “Yeah!”, For example, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), “congratulations” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as a response sound, and as a response image. A character image and a balloon image “Congratulations” are displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

In other words, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 serve as control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game that is executed based on the establishment of the start condition.
Then, the control means (in the case of the present embodiment, the production control device 300), based on the voice recognition information (voice recognition command), the response production (output of response voice or response image) corresponding to the content information (input speech number). For example).
In the case of the present embodiment, the control means executes an effect corresponding to the content information (input serif number) and language type information (input language type) included in the voice recognition information (voice recognition command) as a response effect. Is possible.
In the case of this embodiment, the control means can execute a response effect based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and voice recognition information (voice recognition command).

The effect control device 300 can execute at least one of the effect of outputting the response sound from the speakers 19a and 19b and the effect of displaying the response image on the display device 41 as the response effect. I just need it.
In addition, as a response effect, a case where only an effect that outputs a response sound from the speakers 19a, 19b or the like is executed, a case where only an effect that displays a response image on the display device 41 or the like is executed, and a response sound that is output from the speakers 19a, 19b. The case where both the effect output from the player and the effect of displaying the response image on the display device 41 etc. are executed, and the input line number stored in the player serif content area, the current game state, etc. Also good.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a flow from when a sound is input to the microphone 80a to when a response effect for the sound is executed in the present embodiment.
For example, when the voice “thank you” uttered by the player is input to the microphone 80a, the speech recognition unit 80 refers to the input speech number / language type table shown in FIG. 116, and the input speech number is “4”. And the input language type is “A”, and a voice recognition command including the input serif number “4” and the input language type “A” is output to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs an output line number “6” corresponding to the input line number “4” from the output line numbers stored in the output line number / language type table shown in FIG. 117 (in the case of this embodiment). , “6”, “7”, “30”, and “31” may be selected), and input from the output language types stored in the output line number / language type table The same output language type “A” as the language type “A” is selected, and “6-A” is set as the audio output number. As a result, “you are welcome” corresponding to the voice output number “6-A” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b, etc. as a reply voice.

  For example, when the voice “OOKINI” uttered by the player is input to the microphone 80a, the speech recognition unit 80 refers to the input speech number / language type table shown in FIG. It is determined that the input language type is “B”, and a speech recognition command including the input serif number “4” and the input language type “B” is output to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs an output line number “6” corresponding to the input line number “4” from the output line numbers stored in the output line number / language type table shown in FIG. 117 (in the case of this embodiment). , “6”, “7”, “30”, and “31” may be selected), and input from the output language types stored in the output line number / language type table The same output language type “B” as the language type “B” is selected, and “6-B” is set as the audio output number. As a result, “Kamagen” corresponding to the voice output number “6-B” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b and the like as a reply voice. In this way, when the player speaks in a dialect, the player responds with the dialect, so that the player can feel attachment to the gaming machine 10 and a sense of familiarity.

The language type is not limited to “standard language”, “Kansai dialect”, and “English”, and can be arbitrarily changed arbitrarily. For example, dialects other than “Kansai dialect” (“Tohoku dialect”) Or “Okinawa dialect”). In this case, when displaying a reply image that responds in a dialect, it is possible to cause an image related to the area of the dialect (for example, a special product for each region or an image of a local character) to appear in the reply image.
Further, the language type may be “polite way of speaking”, “ordinary way of speaking”, “noisy way of speaking”, or the like. In this case, if the player speaks in a polite manner, it can respond in a polite manner, if it speaks in a normal manner, it responds in a normal manner, and if it speaks in a miscellaneous manner, it can be configured to respond in a lazy manner It is.

Further, the arrangement positions of the speakers 19a and 19b can be arbitrarily changed as long as the player can hear the sound output from the speaker. For example, the sound output from the speaker can be easily heard. In addition, the frame decoration device 18 (that is, the protruding portion of the glass frame 15) or the like can be arranged near the player's face.
Further, a speaker for outputting a reply voice may be provided separately from the speakers 19a and 19b. At that time, a speaker for outputting a reply voice is set in the vicinity or inside of the tactile operation unit 90 having a predetermined three-dimensional shape (in the case of the present embodiment, a horse shape), or a frame accessory 95 having a predetermined three-dimensional shape ( It may be provided in the vicinity or inside of (see FIG. 133). As a result, a sense of unity is produced between the tactile sense operating unit 90, the frame accessory 95 (see FIG. 133), and the effect of outputting the reply voice, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

Further, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the microphone 80a near the frame decoration device 18 (the protruding portion of the glass frame 15), that is, near the player's face, the player's voice is collected. It becomes easy.
Note that the arrangement position of the microphone 80a can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is a position where the player's voice can be collected. For example, as shown in FIG. 122, the microphone 80a is configured to be convertible between a visible state and an invisible state, and is configured to appear only when voice recognition is enabled (to be made visible). May be. With this configuration, the appearance of the microphone 80a can prompt the player to speak (speak).

[Tactile sensor input interrupt processing]
Next, touch detection sensor input interrupt processing in timer interrupt processing (not shown) by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) will be described.
In the tactile detection sensor input interruption process, as shown in FIG. 123, first, interruption is prohibited (step D201), and the state of a signal from the tactile detection sensor 90a included in the tactile operation unit 90 is read (step D202).

Here, the haptic operation unit 90 of the present embodiment includes an operation main body 90b (see FIG. 1) formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (in the case of the present embodiment, a horse shape), and an operation main body by a player or the like. And a tactile detection sensor 90a (see FIG. 4) for detecting an operation of 90b (1 to 3 dimensional operation such as stroking, stroking, and pinching).
The operation main body 90b is made of, for example, an elastic member such as sponge or rubber, and is elastically deformed in response to an operation of the operation main body 90b by a player or the like.
The tactile detection sensor 90a detects, for example, a displacement (direction or amount of displacement) of the operation main body 90b when the player or the like operates the operation main body 90b. If the tactile sensor 90a can detect the displacement of the operation main body 90b in the three-dimensional direction, the tactile sensor 90a includes a sensor composed of a plurality of sensors (for example, a sensor that detects displacement in the X-axis direction, and a Y-axis direction). The sensor part which detects the displacement of this, and the sensor part which detects the displacement of a Z-axis direction) may be sufficient, and the sensor which consists of one sensor part may be sufficient.
That is, the operation main body 90b serves as an operation means that allows a player to perform a three-dimensional operation.
In addition, the tactile detection sensor 90a serves as an operation detection unit capable of detecting a displacement in the three-dimensional direction of the operation unit (operation main body 90b).

  Next, based on the reading result in step D202, state change data relating to a state change (direction of displacement, amount, etc.) in the pressing direction of the operation main body 90b (straight direction such as tapping) is generated (step D203). In the present embodiment, the pressing direction is a downward direction (vertical direction). The state change data in the pressing direction is generated regardless of whether there is an input (input of the pressing direction) based on a pressing direction operation ("tapping operation", etc.) by a player or the like. As the state change data in the pressing direction, for example, data such as the displacement direction “X: 0” and the displacement amount “X: 0” is generated.

Next, based on the reading result in step D202, state change data relating to the state change (displacement direction, amount, etc.) in the shear direction (planar direction such as stroking and pinching) of the operation main body 90b is generated (step D204). . In the present embodiment, the shear direction is a plane direction perpendicular to the vertical direction. The state change data in the shear direction is generated regardless of whether or not there is an input (shear direction input) based on the player's operation in the shear direction (such as “stroking operation” or “pinning operation”). If there is no data, for example, data such as the displacement direction “Y: 0, Z: 0” and the displacement amount “Y: 0, Z: 0” are generated as the state change data in the shear direction.
Next, it is determined whether or not the detection of the operation in the shear direction is continuing (step D205). Specifically, it is determined whether a shear direction detection continuation flag set in step D207, which will be described later, is set.

  If it is determined in step D205 that the detection of the operation in the shear direction is not ongoing (step D205; No), that is, if the shear direction detection ongoing flag is not set, the shear direction generated in step D204. It is determined whether or not a value based on the state change data (for example, the value of the displacement amount in the shear direction) exceeds a preset input confirmation threshold value in the shear direction (step D206).

If it is determined in step D206 that the value based on the state change data in the shearing direction has exceeded the input confirmation threshold value in the shearing direction (step D206; Yes), the flag for continuing shearing direction detection is set (step D207). The information based on the shear direction input (shear direction state change data generated in step D204) is saved in the shear input history area (step D208).
Next, the timer initial value is saved in the shear input allowable timer area (step D209), the interrupt is permitted (step D210), and the tactile detection sensor input interrupt process is terminated. Here, the shear input allowable timer is a timer for measuring the detection allowable time of the operation in the shear direction. Since the operation in the shearing direction takes longer to determine than the operation in the pressing direction, in this embodiment, the detection allowable time for the operation in the shearing direction is set, and the operation in the shearing direction is determined within the detection allowable time. If not, it is determined that the player or the like has stopped the operation in the shearing direction and clears the shearing direction detection ongoing flag and the input history information stored in the shearing input history area. Yes.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step D206 that the value based on the state change data in the shear direction does not exceed the input confirmation threshold value in the shear direction (step D206; No), the state in the pressing direction generated in step D203. It is determined whether or not a value based on the change data (for example, a displacement amount value in the pressing direction) exceeds a preset input confirmation threshold value in the pressing direction (step D211).

If it is determined in step D211 that the value based on the state change data in the pressing direction does not exceed the input confirmation threshold value in the pressing direction (step D211; No), the process proceeds to step D210.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D211 that the value based on the state change data in the pressing direction exceeds the input confirmation threshold value in the pressing direction (step D211; Yes), a tactile detection sensor input flag is set (step D212). The input type / input intensity information is generated based on the information based on the input in the pressing direction (the pressing direction state change data generated in step D203), saved (step D213), and the process proceeds to step D210. In the case of the present embodiment, in step D213, the “tapping operation” as the input type and the value of the displacement amount in the pressing direction as the input intensity are saved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the operation in the shearing direction is determined with priority over the operation in the pressing direction. For example, if a force is applied to the hand that operates the tactile operation unit 90 (specifically, the operation main body unit 90b), the hand may be pressed during the operation in the shearing direction. If priority is given to the operation in (2), the operation in the shear direction takes more time to confirm than the operation in the push-down direction, so that the player is performing the operation in the shear direction. There arises a problem that it is determined that an unintended operation (operation in the pressing direction) is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such inconvenience, the operation in the shearing direction is determined with priority over the operation in the pressing direction.

If it is determined in step D205 that the operation in the shearing direction is being continued (step D205; Yes), that is, if the shearing direction detection ongoing flag is set, the process proceeds to step D214. Then, the processing when the detection of the operation that takes time to confirm (operation in the shear direction) is started is performed.
In step D214, it is determined whether or not the value based on the state change data in the shear direction generated in step D204 exceeds the input confirmation threshold value in the shear direction (step D214).

If it is determined in step D214 that the value based on the state change data in the shear direction does not exceed the input confirmation threshold value in the shear direction (step D214; No), the process proceeds to step D221.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D214 that the value based on the state change data in the shear direction has exceeded the input confirmation threshold value in the shear direction (step D214; Yes), information based on the shear direction input in the shear input history area. The state change data in the shear direction generated in step D204 is saved (step D215).
Next, it is determined whether or not the input type in the shear direction can be determined from the input history information stored in the shear input history area (step D216). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the input history information satisfies a preset input confirmation condition in the shear direction. In the case of the present embodiment, two conditions, a “stroking operation” confirmation condition and a “spinning operation” confirmation condition, are set as input confirmation conditions in the shear direction, and it is determined whether one of them is satisfied. The determination condition of “stroking operation” is, for example, a condition that “a reciprocating operation for reciprocating a finger or the like in contact with the operation main body 90 b has been detected a predetermined first number of times”, or a determination condition of “tapping operation” is, for example, It is a condition that “a turning operation for turning a finger or the like pinching the operation main body 90b beyond a predetermined first turning angle is detected”.

When it is determined in step D216 that the input type in the shear direction can be determined (step D216; Yes), that is, the input history information satisfies the determination condition of the “stroking operation” or the determination condition of the “pinning operation”. In this case, a tactile detection sensor input flag is set (step D217), input type / input intensity information is generated based on the input history information stored in the shear input history area, and saved (step D218). In the case of this embodiment, if it is determined in step D216 that the input history information satisfies the “stroking operation” determination condition, in step D218, “stroking operation” as the input type and displacement in the shear direction as the input intensity. The average value (which may be the maximum value, etc.) is saved. If it is determined in step D216 that the input history information satisfies the confirmation condition of the “Tuning operation”, in Step D218, the “Tuning operation” as the input type and the average value of the displacement in the shear direction as the input intensity ( The maximum value etc. may be saved.
Next, all input history information stored in the shear input history area is cleared (step D219), the shear direction detection continuation flag is cleared (step D220), and the process proceeds to step D210.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step D216 that the input type in the shearing direction cannot be determined (step D216; No), that is, both the determination condition for the input history information “stroking operation” and the determination condition for “pinning operation” are both If not, the process proceeds to step D221.
In step D221, it is determined whether or not the effective time of the tactile sensor 90a is set (step D221). Here, the effective time of the tactile sensor 90a is an effective time for production. The valid time of the tactile sensor 90a is set during reach production. When the effective time of the tactile detection sensor 90a is set, in step D209, a value based on the remaining time of the effective time may be saved as a timer initial value in the shearing input allowable timer area. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the effective time has elapsed based on the value of the shear input allowable timer area (shear input allowable timer).
If it is determined in step D221 that the effective time of the tactile sensor 90a is set (step D221; Yes), it is determined whether or not the effective time remains for a specified time (step D222).

  If it is determined in step D222 that the effective time of the tactile sensor 90a does not remain longer than the specified time (step D222; No), the input history information (current input history information) stored in the shear input history area From this, it is determined whether or not the input type in the shear direction can be predicted (step D223). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current input history information satisfies a preset input prediction condition in the shear direction. In the case of the present embodiment, two prediction conditions of “stroking operation” and “prediction operation” are set as input prediction conditions in the shear direction, and it is determined whether one of them is satisfied. Predictive conditions for the “stroking operation” are, for example, a condition that “a reciprocating operation for reciprocating a finger or the like in contact with the operation main body 90b is detected a predetermined second number of times”, and a predictive condition for the “spinning operation” is, for example, It is a condition that “a turning operation for turning a finger or the like pinching the operation main body 90b by a predetermined second turning angle or more is detected”. As the second number of times, a number smaller than the first number of the “stroking operation” determination condition is set, and as the second rotation angle, an angle smaller than the first rotation angle of the “spinning operation” determination condition. Is set.

  When it is determined in step D223 that the input type in the shearing direction can be predicted (step D223; Yes), that is, the current input history information satisfies the prediction condition of “stroking operation” or the prediction condition of “spinning operation”. If so, the tactile detection sensor input flag is set (step D217), the input type / input intensity information is generated based on the input history information stored in the shear input history area, and saved (step D218). ), The process proceeds to step D219. In the case of the present embodiment, if it is determined in step D223 that the current input history information satisfies the prediction condition of “stroking operation”, in step D218, “stroking operation” as the input type and shearing direction as the input intensity. The average value of displacement (which may be a maximum value or the like) is saved. Further, when it is determined in step D223 that the current input history information satisfies the prediction condition of the “Tuning operation”, in Step D218, the “Tuning operation” as the input type and the average displacement amount in the shear direction as the input intensity. The value (which may be the maximum value etc.) is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step D221 that the effective time of the tactile detection sensor 90a is not set (step D221; No), it is determined in step D222 that the effective time of the tactile detection sensor 90a remains for a predetermined time or more. In the case (step D222; Yes), if it is determined in step D223 that the input type in the shear direction is not predictable (step D223; No), the shear input allowable timer stored in the shear input allowable timer area is- 1 is updated (step D224), and it is determined whether or not the updated shear input allowable timer is “0” (step D225).
If it is determined in step D225 that the shear input allowable timer is not “0” (step D225; No), that is, if the detection allowable time for the operation in the shear direction has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step D210.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D225 that the shear input allowable timer is “0” (step D225; Yes), that is, if the allowable detection time of the operation in the shear direction has elapsed, the shear input history area is stored. All the input history information that has been entered is cleared (step D219), the shear direction detection continuing flag is cleared (step D220), and the process proceeds to step D210. This prevents the player from continuing to save the input history information for the operation in the shearing direction or setting the flag for the ongoing shearing operation detection even though the player stopped the operation in the shearing direction. can do.

The pressing direction is not limited to the downward direction (up and down direction), and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Further, it is possible to configure a plurality of directions as a pressing direction, and monitor an input of each of the plurality of directions as an input of the pressing direction, thereby confirming the operation in the pressing direction.
Further, the shearing direction is not limited to a plane direction perpendicular to the vertical direction, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. It is also possible to configure the shear direction as a plurality of plane directions, monitor the inputs of the plurality of plane directions as inputs of the shear direction, and determine the operation in the shear direction.
In this embodiment, the input in the pressing direction and the input in the shearing direction are separately monitored, and the operation in the pressing direction (“tapping operation” or the like) and the operation in the shearing direction (“stroking operation”, “pinning operation”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inputs in the pressing direction and the shear direction are monitored simultaneously, and the “tapping operation”, “stroking operation”, and “spinning operation” are monitored from the monitoring results. It is also possible to configure so as to determine which one is. That is, the input in the three-dimensional direction is monitored at the same time to detect the displacement in the X-axis direction, the displacement in the Y-axis direction, and the displacement in the Z-axis direction. It is also possible to configure to determine whether the operation is “operation” or “continuous operation”.

FIG. 124 shows a timing chart for explaining how to confirm the operation on the tactile sense operating unit 90.
FIG. 124A is a timing chart for explaining an example of how to confirm the “slap operation”.
In the case of “tapping operation”, if it is determined once that the value based on the state change data in the pressing direction has exceeded the input confirmation threshold value in the pressing direction, the operation is confirmed.
In addition, since the “tapping operation” is determined once it is determined that the input confirmation threshold value in the pressing direction has been exceeded, the effective period of operation (the effective time of the tactile sensor 90a, that is, the effective time for production) is set. Even if the “tapping operation” is executed at the timing when the valid period remains, the operation is confirmed.
In the case of the present embodiment, the input type / input intensity information generated during the effective period of the operation is configured to be stored until the effective period ends. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 124 (a), two types of “tapping operation” input type and input intensity information are stored when the valid period of the operation ends.

FIG. 124B is a timing chart illustrating an example of how to determine the “stroking operation”.
In the case of “stroking operation”, it is determined multiple times that the value based on the state change data in the shear direction has exceeded the input confirmation threshold value in the shear direction, and it is determined once when the input history information satisfies the definite condition of “stroking operation”. Then, the operation is confirmed. The same applies to the “pinning operation”.
In this example, a condition that “a reciprocating operation for reciprocating a finger or the like in contact with the operation main body 90 b has been detected five times or more” is set as a final condition for the “stroking operation”.

FIG. 124C is a timing chart illustrating another example of how to determine the “stroking operation”.
In the “stroking operation”, the effective period of the operation (the effective time of the tactile detection sensor 90a, that is, the effective time for production) is set, and the execution of the “stroking operation” is started at a timing when the effective period remains slightly. Then, there is a possibility that the input history information does not satisfy the definite condition of “stroking operation”. Therefore, if the valid period does not remain for the specified time or more, if the current input history information satisfies the prediction condition of “stroking operation”, it is considered that “stroking operation” is performed, and “stroking operation” is confirmed. Is done. The same applies to the “pinning operation”.
In this example, a condition that “a reciprocating operation for reciprocating a finger or the like in contact with the operation main body 90 b has been detected twice or more” is set as a prediction condition for “stroking operation”.

  In this embodiment, the operation in the shearing direction is determined with priority over the operation in the pressing direction. Therefore, for example, when the “slap operation” shown in FIG. 124 (a) and the “stroking operation” shown in FIG. 124 (b) are executed simultaneously, the first “slap operation” shown in FIG. 124 (a). ”Is executed during the execution of the“ stroking operation ”shown in FIG. 124 (b), the first“ tapping operation ”is ignored, and processing for determining the“ stroking operation ”is performed. It is said. On the other hand, the second “tapping operation” shown in FIG. 124A is executed at a timing when the “stroking operation” shown in FIG. 124B is not executed, so the second “tapping operation”. A process for confirming is performed.

  Also, for example, when the “tapping operation” shown in FIG. 124 (a) and the “stroking operation” shown in FIG. 124 (c) are executed simultaneously, the first “tapping operation” shown in FIG. 124 (a). ”Is executed at a timing when the“ stroking operation ”shown in FIG. 124C is not executed, the process for determining the first“ tapping operation ”is performed. On the other hand, since the second “tapping operation” shown in FIG. 124 (a) is executed during the execution of the “stroking operation” shown in FIG. 124 (c), the second “tapping operation” is ignored. Thus, processing for determining the “stroking operation” is performed.

(Tactile operation monitoring process)
Next, the tactile operation monitoring process (step D12) in the main process by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) will be described.
In the tactile operation monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 125, the tactile detection sensor input flag set in step D212 or step D217 of the tactile detection sensor input interrupt process is set, and the tactile detection sensor input flag is set. It is determined whether or not the current gaming state has ended (step D301). It is assumed that the information regarding the gaming state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set is set together with the tactile detection sensor input flag.

If it is determined in step D301 that the tactile detection sensor input flag is not set, or the tactile detection sensor input flag is set, but the gaming state at the time of setting the tactile detection sensor input flag has not ended. (Step D301; No), the tactile operation monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D301 that the tactile detection sensor input flag has been set and the gaming state at the time of setting the tactile detection sensor input flag has been completed (step D301; Yes), the tactile detection sensor input is performed. A growth point addition value table corresponding to the gaming state when the flag is set is set (step D302).

In the case of this embodiment, the gaming state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set is
(1) When a special figure variation display game is being executed, neither a reach effect nor an effect instructing the operation of the tactile operation unit 90 is executed, and a launch operation for launching a game ball is performed. Broken state,
(2) To execute a game ball in a state where the special figure variation display game is being executed, the reach effect is not executed, but the effect instructing the operation of the tactile operation unit 90 is being executed. The state where the launch operation of
(3) A state in which a special figure variation display game in which the game result is “out of play” is being executed and a reach effect is being executed,
(4) When the special figure variation display game in which the game result is “winning” is being executed and the reach effect is not being executed, in step D301, the tactile detection sensor input flag Is set, but it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set has not ended, and the tactile operation monitoring process is ended.
Alternatively, the tactile detection sensor input flag is configured not to be set when the gaming state is not any of (1) to (4).

The game state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set is (1) in a state where the special figure variation display game is being executed, and neither the reach effect nor the effect instructing the operation of the tactile operation unit 90 is executed. In addition, when a launch operation for launching a game ball is being performed, or (2) a special figure variation display game is being executed and a reach effect is not being executed, but a tactile operation If the effect instructing the operation of the unit 90 is being executed, and if the launch operation for launching the game ball is being performed, step D302 shows in FIG. 126 (a). Set the growth point addition value table.
Also, when the game state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set is (3) a special figure variation display game in which the result of the game is “out of play” and a reach effect is being executed. In step D302, the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126B is set regardless of whether or not the game ball is fired when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set.
Also, when the game state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set is (4) a special figure variation display game in which the game result is “winning” and a reach effect is being executed. Is configured to set the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (c) in step D302 regardless of whether or not the game ball is fired when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set.
Of course, the growth point addition value table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 126 and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. In addition, the gaming state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set is not limited to the above (1) to (4), and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Next, referring to the growth point addition value table set in step D302, addition value data (growth point increase / decrease value) corresponding to the input type / input intensity information saved in step D213 or step D218 of the tactile sensor input interrupt processing ) Is acquired (step D303).
Next, the addition value data acquired in step D303 is added to the growth point (step D304), and all input information (tactile detection sensor input flag, input type / input intensity information, etc.) of the tactile detection sensor 90a is cleared. (Step D305), the tactile operation monitoring process is terminated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the tactile detection sensor input flag is set, and the processing after step D302 is performed in the state where the gaming state at the time of setting the tactile detection sensor input flag is completed. Therefore, since the input type / input strength information generated during the gaming state at the time of setting the tactile detection sensor input flag is not cleared and saved until the gaming state is finished, the processing ends from the beginning of the gaming state. The added value data can be acquired based on the determined number of operations in the period up to (that is, the number of input types / input intensity information generated during the gaming state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set).

Specifically, in the case where the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (a) is set in step D302, an effect of instructing the operation of the tactile operation unit 90 is executed when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set. If not, the monitoring period “always during normal fluctuation” of the growth point addition value table is referred to.
For example, the input type is “tapping operation”, and the number of times of confirmation of the “tapping operation” (that is, the input type of “tapping operation” generated during the gaming state when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set) The number of input intensity information) is less than the upper limit value, and the average value (may be a maximum value, etc.) of the input intensity of the “slap operation” is less than (weak) the predetermined “slap operation” intensity threshold. If there is, “−1” is acquired as the addition value data in step D303.
Further, for example, the input type is “stroking operation”, the number of determinations of the “stroking operation” is less than the upper limit value, and the average value (maximum value or the like) of the input intensity of the “stroking operation” may be used. ) Is less than the predetermined “stroking operation” intensity threshold (weak), “+1” is acquired as added value data in step D303.
Thus, in the case of the present embodiment, if the operation on the haptic operation unit 90 is an operation that handles the haptic operation unit 90 roughly, the added value data is negative, that is, a penalty for subtracting the growth point is imposed. If the operation is such that the tactile operation unit 90 is handled gently, the added value data is positive, that is, the growth point is added.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), if the number of operations to be determined is equal to or greater than the upper limit value regardless of the input type or input intensity, “ -5 "is acquired. In other words, when the determined number of operations is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the added value data is negative, that is, a penalty is imposed on which the growth point is subtracted.

Also, in the case where the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (a) is set in step D302, and when the effect of instructing the operation of the tactile operation unit 90 is executed when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set. Is referred to the monitoring period “during normal fluctuation effect” in the growth point addition value table.
For example, if the input type is an operation designated by the effect, “+1” is acquired as the addition value data. If the operation is not specified by the effect, “± 0” is acquired as the addition value data. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, if the operation designated by the effect is not executed within the effective period (effective time for the effect), the added value data is “± 0”, that is, the growth point is not added or subtracted. Has been.
Also, for example, when the operation specified in the production is “continuous hit operation”, the input type is “tapping operation”, and the number of times of confirmation of the “tapping operation” is equal to or more than the number (specified number of times) designated in the production If so, “+1” is acquired as the added value data, and “−1” is acquired as the added value data if the number of times is less than the number specified in the effect. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, if the number of continuous hits specified in the production is not executed within the effective period (effective time in the production), the added value data is negative, that is, a penalty that the growth point is subtracted. Is configured to be imposed.

Further, when the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (b) is set in step D302 and the operation is not designated by the reach effect when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set, for example, If the input type is “tapping operation” and the average value of the input intensity of the “tapping operation” (may be a maximum value or the like) is less than the predetermined “tapping operation” intensity threshold (weak), “−1” is acquired as the addition value data.
In addition, when the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (b) is set in step D302, and the operation is designated by the reach effect when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set, the input type is If the operation is specified by the reach effect, “+2” is acquired as the additional value data. If the operation is not specified by the reach effect, “−1” is acquired as the additional value data.
Also, in the case where the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (b) is set in step D302, and the operation designated by the reach effect at the time of setting the tactile detection sensor input flag is “continuous hit operation”. If the input type is “tapping operation” and the number of times of confirmation of the “tapping operation” is equal to or greater than the number of times (specified number) specified in the reach production, “+3” is acquired as the added value data, If it is less than the number of times specified in the production, “−2” is acquired as the additional value data.

In addition, when the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (c) is set in step D302 and the operation is not designated by the reach effect when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set, for example, If the input type is “tapping operation” and the average value of the input intensity of the “tapping operation” (may be a maximum value or the like) is less than the predetermined “tapping operation” intensity threshold (weak), “−5” is acquired as the added value data.
In addition, when the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (c) is set in step D302, and the operation is designated by the reach effect when the tactile detection sensor input flag is set, the input type is If the operation is specified by the reach effect, “+10” is acquired as the additional value data. If the operation is not specified by the reach effect, “−5” is acquired as the additional value data.
Also, in the case where the growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (c) is set in step D302, and the operation designated by the reach effect at the time of setting the tactile detection sensor input flag is “continuous hit operation”. If the input type is “tapping operation” and the determined number of times of “tapping operation” is equal to or greater than the number (specified number of times) specified in the reach production, “+15” is acquired as the additional value data, and the reach If it is less than the number of times specified in the production, “−10” is acquired as the additional value data.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (b) and 126 (c), whether the reach effect that was executed when the tactile detection sensor input flag was set is an outlier reach effect or a hit reach effect. Therefore, the value of the added value data is set to be different.
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the speech content (input speech number) stored in the player speech content area is the content of the speech that is given up (for example, “13 (“ cute ”in standard words)). ”,“ 14 (“clean” in standard words ”),“ 15 (“like” in standard words) ”), a positive value (for example,“ +1 ”) is acquired as addition value data. , If the content is narrative lines (for example, “17 (standard word“ not cute ”)”, “18 (standard word“ no ””), “19 (standard word“ baka ”)”), It is also possible to obtain a negative value (for example, “−1”) as addition value data and add it to the growth point.

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process (step D13) in the main process performed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) will be described.
In the received command check process, as shown in FIG. 127, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands. (Step D401), it is determined whether or not the received command reception number is “0” (Step D402).
If it is determined in step D402 that the command reception count is “0” (step D402; No), the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step D402 that the number of received commands is not “0” (step D402; Yes), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step D403).
Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step D404), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of “0” to “31” (step D405), and the command is copied for the number of received commands. It is determined whether or not it is completed (step D406). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.
If it is determined in step D406 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step D406; No), the process returns to step D404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D406 that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step D406; Yes), the contents of the command area are loaded (step D407), and the received command is analyzed. Command analysis processing (step D408) is performed.
Next, the address of the command area is updated (step D409), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step D410).
If it is determined in step D410 that the command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step D401; No), the process returns to step D407.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D410 that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step D410; Yes), the received command check process is terminated.
As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (step D408) in the received command check process described above will be described.
In the received command analysis process, as shown in FIG. 128, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step D421).

Next, it is determined whether or not MODE is within a normal range (step D422).
If it is determined in step D422 that MODE is not in the normal range (step D422; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D422 that MODE is in the normal range (step D422; Yes), it is determined whether or not ACT is in the normal range (step D423).

If it is determined in step D423 that the ACT is not within the normal range (step D423; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D423 that the ACT is in the normal range (step D423; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step D424).

If it is determined in step D424 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step D424; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D424 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step D424; Yes), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step D425).

If it is determined in step D425 that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step D425; Yes), the variable command process (step D426) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D425 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (step D425; No), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step D427).

If it is determined in step D427 that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step D427; Yes), the jackpot command processing (step D428) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D427 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (step D427; No), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol system command (step D429).

If it is determined in step D429 that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step D429; Yes), symbol-related command processing (step D430) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D429 that MODE is not within the range of symbolic commands (step D429; No), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step D431).

If it is determined in step D431 that MODE is within the range of the single command (step D431; Yes), single command processing (step D432) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D431 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step D431; No), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetch command (step D433).

If it is determined in step D433 that MODE is within the range of the prefetch command (step D433; Yes), prefetch command processing (step D434) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D433 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching command (step D433; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the variable command process (step D426) in the received command analysis process described above will be described.
In the variable command process, as shown in FIG. 129, first, it is determined whether or not the type of the special figure variable display game is unconfirmed (step D441). By this determination, it is possible to check whether the stop symbol command has been received before the fluctuation pattern command is received. Since the stop symbol command includes information on the type of the special symbol fluctuation display game (whether it is special graph 1 or special graph 2), if the stop symbol command can be received normally, the special symbol variation display game It is determined that the type of is not yet determined.

If it is determined in step D441 that the type of the special figure variation display game is unconfirmed (step D441; Yes), the variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D441 that the type of the special figure variation display game is not yet determined (step D411; No), a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step D442) is performed to determine the variation pattern command and the stop symbol. It is determined whether or not the command type does not match (step D443). In the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type (type) of the stop symbol command matches (matches) the variation pattern command. Thus, for example, when the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type do not match, such as a combination of a variation pattern command of hit variation and a stop symbol command of the off symbol, it does not vary (specifically (Do not play the decoration special figure fluctuation display game).

If it is determined in step D443 that the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type do not match (step D443; Yes), the variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D443 that the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type match (step D443; No), a variation effect setting process (step D444) is performed and the variation command process is terminated. .

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, the changing effect setting process (step D444) in the above-described changing command process will be described.
In the variation effect setting process, as shown in FIG. 130, first, a variation pattern classification process (step D451) is performed, the entire notice information area is cleared (step D452), and the first half variation notice lottery process (step D453). I do.
Next, as a result of the classification in step D451, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command is roughly classified into a variation pattern with no reach variation (step D454).

If it is determined in step D454 that the variation pattern is a variation pattern of non-reach variation (step D454; Yes), the process proceeds to step D456.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D454 that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation without reach is not roughly divided (step D454; No), that is, if the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation with reach, the latter half fluctuation. The middle notice lottery process (step D455) is performed, and the process proceeds to step D456.
In step D456, a decoration stop symbol setting process (step D456) is performed, and thereafter, a variation start setting process (step D457) is performed, and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[First half lottery notice lottery processing]
Next, the first-variation preliminary notice lottery process (step D453) in the above-described variable effect setting process will be described.
In the first half change notice lottery process, as shown in FIG. 131, first, the first half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the production mode, the growth point, etc. is set (step D461). Here, it is also possible to determine hit / miss from the type of variation pattern.

Next, a notice group lottery process (step D462) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect to be executed at the start of change from the notice groups stored in the set first-order notice group table 1 is performed. As a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not “no notice” is selected (step D463).
If it is determined in step D463 that “no notice” is selected (step D463; Yes), information relating to “no notice” is set as effect information of the notice effect to be executed at the start of change, and the process proceeds to step D465. To do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D463 that other than “no notice” is selected (step D463; No), it appears at the start of change from the notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step D462. The notice detail lottery process (step D464) for performing the lottery for selecting the notice pattern of the notice effect to be performed is performed, information regarding the selected notice pattern is set as the notice information of the notice effect to be executed at the start of change, and step D465. Migrate to

In step D465, the first half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern, the production mode, the growth point, etc. is set (step D465).
Next, a notice group lottery process (step D466) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect to be executed before reach from the notice groups stored in the set first half notice group table 2 is performed, As a result of the lottery, it is determined whether “no notice” is selected (step D467).
If it is determined in step D467 that “no notice” is selected (step D467; Yes), information relating to “no notice” is set as effect information of the notice effect to be executed before reach, and the first half change notice is given. The lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D467 that anything other than “no notice” has been selected (step D467; No), it appears before reaching from the notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step D466. The notice detail lottery process (step D468) for performing the lottery for selecting the notice pattern of the notice effect to be performed is performed, information on the selected notice pattern is set as the notice information of the notice effect to be executed before reach, and the first half variation The middle notice lottery process is terminated.

[Lottery processing during the latter half of the change]
Next, the second half fluctuation notice lottery process (step D455) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described.
In the second half change notice lottery process, as shown in FIG. 132, first, the second half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the production mode, the growth point, etc. is set (step D471).

Next, a notice group lottery process (step D472) is performed for performing a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect to be executed during reach from the notice groups stored in the set latter half notice group table 1. As a result of the lottery, it is determined whether “no notice” is selected (step D473).
If it is determined in step D473 that “no notice” is selected (step D473; Yes), information related to “no notice” is set as effect information of the notice effect to be executed during the reach, and the process proceeds to step D475. To do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D473 that anything other than “no notice” is selected (step D473; No), it appears in the reach from the notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step D472. The notice detail lottery process (step D474) for performing the lottery for selecting the notice pattern of the notice effect to be performed is performed, information regarding the selected notice pattern is set as the notice information of the notice effect performed during the reach, and step D475 is performed. Migrate to

In Step D475, the latter half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern, the production mode, the growth point, etc. is set (Step D475).
Next, a notice group lottery process (step D476) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect to be executed after reaching from the notice groups stored in the set latter half notice group table 2 is performed. As a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not “no notice” is selected (step D477).
If it is determined in step D477 that “no notice” has been selected (step D477; Yes), information relating to “no notice” is set as effect information for the notice effect to be executed after the reach, and a notice lottery during the latter half of the change End the process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D477 that a button other than “No notice” has been selected (step D477; No), it is made to appear after reach from the notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step D476. Advance notice lottery processing (step D478) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern for the notice effect is performed, information regarding the selected notice pattern is set as the effect information for the notice effect executed after the reach, and the second half change notice The lottery process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the first half fluctuation notice lottery process of FIG. 131, the notice group lottery process is performed twice assuming that there are two notice timings (at the start of change, before reach) during the first half fluctuation. However, the number of notice timings during the first half variation is not limited to this, and may be one time or three times or more. In addition, the number of executions of the notice group lottery process can be arbitrarily changed according to the number of notice timings during the first half change.
Similarly, in the present embodiment, in the second half fluctuation notice lottery process of FIG. 132, the notice group lottery process is performed twice assuming that there are two notice timings (during reach and after reach) during the second half change. However, the number of notification timings during the latter half of the change is not limited to this, and may be one time or three or more times. In addition, the number of executions of the notice group lottery process can be arbitrarily changed according to the number of notice timings during the latter half of the change.

In addition, in the first-lot fluctuation notice lottery process of FIG. 131, the notice group lottery process is performed twice, and in the previous notice group lottery process (step D462), “notice group of notice effect to be executed at the start of change” is selected. In the subsequent notice group lottery process (step D466), the “notice group for the notice effect to be executed before reaching” is selected. For example, the notice group lottery process is performed only once, and in the notice group lottery process, It is also possible to select “notice group of notice effect to be executed at the start of change” and “notice group of notice effect to be executed before reach”.
Similarly, in the second-half fluctuation notice lottery process in FIG. 132, the notice group lottery process is performed twice, and the notice group for the notice effect to be executed during reach is selected in the previous notice group lottery process (step D472). In the subsequent notice group lottery process (step D476), the “notice group for the notice effect to be executed after reaching” is selected. For example, the notice group lottery process is performed only once, and in the notice group lottery process, It is also possible to select “a notice group for a notice effect performed during reach” and “a notice group for a notice effect executed after reach”.
Furthermore, instead of the first-half variable notice lottery process and the second-half variable notice lottery process, the variable group notice lottery process (specifically, the notice group lottery process is performed only once, In the notice group lottery process, “Notice group for notice effect to be executed at the start of change”, “Notice group for notice effect to be executed before reach”, “Notice group for notice effect to be executed during reach”, and “After notice group to be executed” It is also possible to configure to perform a process of selecting a notice group for the notice effect to be performed).

As in the present embodiment, lottery effects can be executed even with a small amount of memory usage by performing lottery at every notice timing. For example, when selecting “notice group of notice effect to be executed at the start of fluctuation” and “notice group of notice effect to be executed before reach” in two lotteries as in this embodiment, it is used in the two lotteries. As the storage area of the notice group table to be executed, an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect to be executed at the start of change” + “number of notice groups of the notice effect to be executed before reaching” is required. On the other hand, when selecting “Advance notice group for notice effect to be executed at the start of change” and “Notice group of notice effect to be executed before reach” in one lottery, “Execute at the start of change in that one lottery” One combination is selected from the notice group table storing a plurality of combinations of the notice group of the notice effect to be performed and the notice group of the notice effect to be executed before reaching. Therefore, the storage area of the notice group table used in the one lottery has an area of “the number of notice groups of the notice effect to be executed at the start of fluctuation” × “the number of notice groups of the notice effect to be executed before reach”. This is necessary, and as the number of notice timings and the number of notice groups increases, the necessary area increases, so the memory usage increases. For this reason, it is preferable to perform the notice group lottery process at each notice timing from the viewpoint of reducing the memory usage.
On the other hand, by configuring a plurality of notice groups in one lottery, a large number of notice effects can be executed even with a small number of lotteries. That is, from the viewpoint of reducing the number of lotteries, it is preferable to select a plurality of notice groups in one notice group lottery process.

In the present embodiment, the selection rate of the notice pattern is different depending on the growth point. Specifically, when the growth point is high (greater than or equal to a predetermined first threshold value), the probability that a highly reliable notice pattern is selected is increased, and the growth point is low (below the predetermined first threshold value). In some cases, the probability that a highly reliable notice pattern is selected is lowered.
It is also possible to configure the variation pattern selection rate to be different depending on the growth point. Specifically, for example, when the growth point is high (greater than or equal to a predetermined second threshold), the probability that a fluctuation pattern with low reliability (for example, a deviation fluctuation pattern or a normal reach fluctuation pattern) is selected is lowered. When the growth point is low (below a predetermined second threshold value), the probability that a variation pattern with low reliability is selected may be increased.
Further, it is possible to configure so that the selection rate of the notice pattern is different based on the information of the RTC 328. Specifically, for example, the probability that a highly reliable notice pattern is selected only on a specific day may be increased.

That is, the effect control device 300 selects an effect pattern to be executed from among a plurality of effect patterns (notice patterns) based on the detection result of the operation detection means (tactile sensor 90a), and sets the selected effect pattern as the selected effect pattern. A corresponding effect (notice effect) can be executed.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 assigns an evaluation value (addition value data) according to the detection result by the operation detection means (tactile sensor 90a), and accumulates the assigned evaluation value. An effect pattern to be executed (notice effect) is selected from a plurality of effect patterns (notice pattern) according to the value (growth point).

In the case of this embodiment, the production control device 300 performs a launch operation for launching a game ball by a launch device (a hitting ball launching device) that launches a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area 32). 126, when the operating means (operation main body 90b) is operated during a period of time, for example, a growth point addition value table shown in FIG. 126 (a) is set in step D302 of the tactile operation monitoring process (FIG. 125). An evaluation value (addition value data) is assigned.
During a period in which a launch operation for launching a game ball is performed, a command from a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 (a launch start command transmitted when the launch operation is performed, and a launch operation is performed. It can be specified by a firing release command transmitted when there is no more.
In the present embodiment, the period during which the firing operation is performed is specified based on the command from the touch switch. For example, the sensor includes a sensor that detects the rotation of the operation unit 24 (handle). You may make it specify the period when discharge operation is performed based on the command from a sensor.
Further, in the present embodiment, addition value data is given during the period in which the launch operation is performed. For example, a variable display game is being executed (the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is In the period other than 0), additional value data may be given, or the period during which the shooting operation is performed and the variable display game is being executed (the number of holdings in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is other than 0) ) Additional value data may be added during the period.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition is provided, and the result of the game becomes a predetermined result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in some cases, recognizes the contents of the voice uttered by the player and includes voice information including contents information (input serif number) regarding the recognized contents Voice recognition means (voice recognition unit 80) capable of generating information (voice recognition command) is provided, and the control means (in the case of the present embodiment, the production control device 300) is based on the voice recognition information (voice recognition command). A response effect corresponding to the content information (input serif number) can be executed.

  Accordingly, a response effect corresponding to the content of the voice uttered by the player, that is, an effect that makes the gaming machine 10 feel familiar, can increase the willingness to participate in the effect and enhance the interest of the game. .

  Further, the control means (in the case of the present embodiment, the effect control device 300) may be configured to execute a response effect based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and voice recognition information (voice recognition command). Is possible.

  By configuring in this way, a response effect suitable for the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 can be executed, so that the familiarity with the gaming machine 10 can be given more.

  The voice recognition means (speech recognition unit 80) recognizes the language type of the voice uttered by the player, and uses the language type information (input language type) related to the recognized language type as voice recognition information (voice recognition command). The control means (in the case of this embodiment, the production control device 300) can generate information including the content information (input serif number) and language type information included in the voice recognition information (voice recognition command) as a response production. It is also possible to configure such that an effect corresponding to (input language type) is executed.

  By configuring in this way, a response effect corresponding to the language type used by the player can be executed, so that the friendliness of the gaming machine 10 can be given more.

  Also, the control means (in the case of the present embodiment, the production control device 300), when the voice recognition means (voice recognition unit 80) cannot recognize the language type of the voice, the voice recognition information (voice Content information (input serif number) regarding the content of the speech included in the recognition command), and language type information (input language type) included in the speech recognition information generated before the speech recognition information (speech recognition command) It is also possible to configure so as to execute an effect corresponding to the above.

By configuring in this way, when the speech recognition means (speech recognition unit 80) cannot recognize the language type, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the language type used previously by the player. The friendliness with respect to the gaming machine 10 can be given more.
In this embodiment, when the speech recognition means (speech recognition unit 80) cannot recognize the language type, the language type (input language type) already stored in the player language type area, that is, the voice The response effect corresponding to the language type information (input language type) related to the language type last recognized by the recognition unit 80 is configured to be executed, but what to do when the speech recognition unit 80 cannot recognize the language type. It is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of language types are stored in the player language type area (when the number of stored language types reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the oldest one is deleted and a new language type is stored) If the speech recognition means (speech recognition unit 80) cannot recognize the language type, it is stored among the language types (input language types) stored in the player language type area. It is also possible to perform a response effect corresponding to the language type with the largest number.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in the gaming machine provided with the operation means (operation main body portion 90b) on the front side, the operation means (operation main body portion 90b) is three-dimensional by the player. Operation detection means (tactile detection sensor 90a) capable of detecting displacement in the three-dimensional direction of the operation means (operation main body 90b), and the detection result of the operation detection means (tactile detection sensor 90a) An effect pattern to be executed can be selected from a plurality of effect patterns (notice patterns) based on the effect pattern (notice effect) corresponding to the selected effect pattern.

Therefore, since the operation means (operation main body 90b) capable of one to three-dimensional operation is provided, the operation of the operation means (operation main body 90b) does not become monotonous, and the operation means (operation main body 90b). The motivation for the operation of the game can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.
Note that the one to three-dimensional operation is not limited to the “tapping operation”, “stroking operation”, and “tapping operation”, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  Also, an evaluation value (addition value data) is assigned according to the detection result by the operation detection means (tactile detection sensor 90a), and there are a plurality of effect patterns (notice patterns) according to the accumulated value (growth point) of the assigned evaluation values. ) Can be configured to select an effect pattern to be executed (notice effect).

By configuring in this way, an evaluation value (addition value data) is given according to the detection result by the operation detection means (tactile sensor 90a), and an effect pattern (notice pattern) is created based on the accumulated value of the evaluation value. Since the selection can be made, the willingness to operate the operation means (operation main body 90b) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.
The effect pattern selected based on the detection result of the operation detection means (tactile detection sensor 90a) is not limited to the effect pattern (notice pattern) of the notice effect, for example, the big hit executed during the big hit fluctuation It can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate to the production pattern of the fluctuation production, the production pattern of the reach production executed during the reach fluctuation, or the like.

  Further, a launching device (hit ball launching device) for launching a game ball in a predetermined game area (game region 32) is provided, and a launching operation for launching a game ball by the launching device (hit ball launching device) is performed. It is also possible to provide an evaluation value (addition value data) when the operation means (operation main body 90b) is operated during the period.

  By configuring in this way, an evaluation value (additional value data) is given when the operation means (operation main body 90b) is operated during a period in which a launch operation for launching a game ball is being performed. It is possible to suppress fraud, such as stopping.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
Note that the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a frame accessory 95 is provided instead of the voice recognition unit 80 and the tactile operation unit 90. Therefore, hereinafter, parts having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment may include either the voice recognition unit 80 or the tactile operation unit 90 in addition to the frame accessory 95, or both the voice recognition unit 80 and the tactile operation unit 90. May be provided.

A frame accessory 95 that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 133 shows an example of a front view of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 134 shows an example of a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the frame accessory 95 has a predetermined three-dimensional shape (in the case of the present embodiment, a horse shape), and a part of the frame accessory 95 is formed on the right side of the front surface of the glass frame 15. It is provided to overlap with the front and rear.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, a cylindrical game ball rolling passage 42 through which a game ball can pass is provided at the right portion of the center case 40 at a position that does not overlap the frame accessory 95 in the front-rear direction. . The game ball that has been launched (so-called right-handed) into the game area 32 on the right side of the game area 32 can pass through the game ball rolling passage 42.
The game ball rolling passage 42 is configured so that a game ball passing through the game ball rolling passage 42 can be visually recognized. Specifically, at least the front surface of the game ball rolling passage 42 is made of a material that can visually recognize the inside of the game ball rolling passage 42 (for example, transparent). The game ball rolling passage 42 may be formed in a groove shape having an open front side. In this case, regardless of the material of the game ball rolling passage 42, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the game ball rolling passage 42.
In other words, the game ball rolling passage 42 is disposed at a position that does not overlap the front and rear with the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95), and the game ball rolling on the game ball rolling passage 42 can be visually recognized. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 134, a part of the frame accessory 95 overlaps with the right game area of the game area 32 in the front-rear direction. Since the right-handed game ball passes through the game ball rolling passage 42 instead of the right game area, the right-handed game ball is provided by providing the game ball rolling passage 42 at a position that does not overlap the frame accessory 95. It is possible to prevent the ball from temporarily becoming difficult to visually recognize behind the frame accessory 95 (the right game area). Thus, both the frame accessory 95 and the right-handed game ball can be viewed at the same time, and the visibility of the right-handed game ball is improved.

The frame accessory 95 may be movable or non-movable.
When the frame accessory 95 is movable, for example, as shown in FIG. 134, the frame accessory 95 is in a first state (initial state) that does not overlap the display screen of the display device 41 (hereinafter referred to as “front”). , Simply “a state that does not overlap the screen”) and a state where a part of the second state overlaps the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 135 (hereinafter, simply “a state that overlaps the screen”). And can be configured to be convertible.

Here, when the frame accessory 95 can be converted into a state that does not overlap the screen (see FIG. 134) and a state that overlaps the screen (see FIG. 135), the game ball rolling passage 42 shown in FIG. Since it is arranged so as to pass through a region overlapping with the movable range of the accessory 95, the frame accessory 95 overlaps with the front and rear, or does not overlap with the front and rear. Specifically, the game ball rolling passage 42 shown in FIG. 134 (the game ball rolling passage 42 is not movable) is converted into a state in which the frame accessory 95 overlaps the screen (see FIG. 135). When the frame accessory 95 is overlapped with the frame accessory 95, and when the frame accessory 95 is converted into a state where it does not overlap the screen (see FIG. 134), the frame accessory 95 does not overlap with the front and rear.
That is, when the frame accessory 95 is movable, the game ball rolling passage 42 is arranged so as to pass through a region overlapping the front and rear of the movable range of the frame accessory 95 so that the frame accessory 95 The ball rolling passage 42 can be converted into a state where it overlaps with the front and rear and a state where it does not overlap.

In the present embodiment, when the frame accessory 95 is movable, the frame accessory 95 is disposed so as to overlap the cover glass 14 in the front and rear directions in either the first state or the second state. However, the frame accessory 95 is, for example, arranged so as not to overlap with the cover glass 14 in either one of the first state and the second state, and to overlap with the cover glass 14 in the other state. May be.
That is, the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) may be arranged such that at least a part of the decorative accessory is always positioned in front of the transparent member (cover glass 14), or the transparent member (cover It may be arranged to be movable in front of the glass 14).

In this embodiment, when the frame accessory 95 is movable, the frame accessory 95 does not overlap the game ball rolling passage 42 in the first state (initial state) in the second state. However, in the first state (initial state), the frame accessory 95 overlaps with the game ball rolling passage 42 in the front and back, and in the second state, the game ball rolling passage 42 overlaps the front and rear. You may comprise so that it may not overlap with the ball rolling channel | path 42 back and forth.
In this embodiment, when the frame accessory 95 is movable, the state in which the jaw of the horse-shaped frame accessory 95 is pulled (lowered) is defined as the first state, and the state in which the jaw is raised is referred to as the first state. As the two states, the frame accessory 95 is configured to be convertible into these two types of states, but the manner of movement of the frame accessory 95 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the frame accessory 95 may be configured to be movable between a first position and a second position, the state at the first position may be the first state, and the state at the second position may be the second state. Further, the frame accessory 95 can be configured to be convertible into three or more states.

FIG. 135 shows Modification 1 of the game ball rolling passage 42.
When the frame accessory 95 is movable, that is, when the frame accessory 95 can be converted into a plurality of states, the game ball rolling passage 42 is connected to the frame regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95. It is also possible to arrange them so as not to overlap the accessory 95.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, the game ball rolling passage 42 is arranged so as to bypass a region overlapping with the movable range of the frame accessory 95 in the front-rear direction. 42 regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95 (for example, when the frame accessory 95 is in a state where it does not overlap the screen or in a state where it overlaps the screen) It can be avoided.
In other words, the gaming ball rolling passage 42 of the first modification is arranged so that the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) and the front and rear are the same regardless of whether the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is in the first state or the second state. The game ball rolling in the game ball rolling passage 42 can be visually recognized.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 135, when the game ball rolling passage 42 overlaps with the display screen of the display device 41 in the front and rear, the game ball rolling passage 42 can be visually recognized behind the game ball rolling passage 42. It is preferable that the display device 41 is formed of a member (for example, a transparent member) so that an image displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 can be seen through the game ball rolling passage 42.

FIG. 136 shows a second modification of the game ball rolling passage 42.
Regardless of whether or not the frame accessory 95 is movable, and when the frame accessory 95 is movable, regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95, the game ball rolling passage 42 is connected to the frame It is also possible to arrange it so as to overlap the accessory 95 in the front-rear direction.
Specifically, when the frame accessory 95 is non-movable and is fixed so as not to overlap the screen (see FIG. 134), for example, as shown in FIG. The game ball rolling passage 42 can be overlapped with the frame accessory 95 in the front-rear direction by being arranged so as to overlap with the right game area.
Further, when the frame accessory 95 can be converted into a state that does not overlap the screen (see FIG. 134) and a state that overlaps the screen (see FIG. 135), for example, as shown in FIG. Is arranged so as to overlap the right game area in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball rolling passage 42 can overlap with the frame accessory 95 regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95. .
In this case, the game ball rolling passage 42 is arranged so as to pass through the right game area and does not overlap with the display screen of the display device 41, so it is not necessary to be configured by a cylindrical or groove-like member. Instead, for example, nails may be provided in the game area 32 (specifically, the right game area).
Further, in this case, regardless of whether or not the frame accessory 95 is movable, and when the frame accessory 95 is movable, the frame accessory 95 is not affected regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95. It is preferable to configure so that the game ball rolling passage 42 can be visually recognized when looking back.

In this case, the front of the gaming machine 10 regardless of whether the frame accessory 95 is movable or not, regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95 when the frame accessory 95 is movable. It is more preferable that the game ball rolling passage 42 can be viewed from the player sitting at the player without looking into the rear of the frame accessory 95.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, the cover glass 14 is projected so that the frame accessory 95 protrudes from the front right end of the glass frame 15 toward the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10. It arrange | positions diagonally with respect to. By arranging the frame accessory 95 in this way, a space opened toward the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10 is formed between the frame accessory 95 and the cover glass 14, and the gaming machine 10, the game ball rolling passage 42 disposed behind the frame accessory 95 can be visually recognized from the space without being obstructed by the frame accessory 95 or the like. Become. Thus, even when the game ball rolling passage 42 is provided at a position overlapping the front and rear of the frame accessory 95, as long as it is sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, the frame accessory 95 and the game ball Both the game ball passing through the rolling passage 42 can be viewed at the same time.

  That is, when the game ball rolling passage 42 of the second modification is visible to a player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10 regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95, as shown in FIG. Even when the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is in either the first state or the second state, the game ball rolling in the game ball rolling passage 42 can be visually recognized.

FIG. 138 and FIG. 139 show Modification 3 of the game ball rolling passage 42.
When the frame accessory 95 is movable, the game ball rolling passage 42 may be bifurcated on the exit side.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, the game ball rolling passage 42 includes a first downflow path 42 a that overlaps with the frame accessory 95 in the front and rear directions regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95, and a frame accessory. Regardless of the state of 95, the frame accessory 95 and the second downflow passage 42b that does not overlap in the front-rear direction may be provided.
In this case, the first downflow path 42a is visible to the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, regardless of the state of the frame accessory 95, like the gaming ball rolling path 42 shown in FIG. Preferably there is.
The first downflow path 42a is configured to overlap or not overlap with the frame accessory 95 depending on the state of the frame accessory 95, like the game ball rolling passage 42 shown in FIG. May be.

For example, as shown in FIG. 139, the game ball rolling passage 42 includes a flow path switching member 42c, and the flow path switching member 42c passes the first downflow path 42a at a predetermined timing. The first switching state (see FIG. 139 (a)) for closing the inlet of the second downstream path 42b is switched, or the inlet of the first downstream path 42a is closed so that the game ball passes through the second downstream path 42b. It is configured to be able to switch to the two switching state (see FIG. 139 (b)).
In other words, the game ball rolling passage 42 of the third modification example is obtained when the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is in either the first state or the second state by the flow path switching member 42c switching the flow path. In addition, the game ball rolling in the game ball rolling passage 42 is configured to be visible.

FIG. 140 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation timing of the frame accessory 95 and the switching timing of the flow path switching member 42c in the present embodiment.
In this embodiment, as a special gaming state in which a high probability state occurs after the end of a round game, a probability change is performed that provides an effect of notifying (suggesting) that a high probability state will be reached after the end of the round game from the beginning of the round game. Special gaming state and promotion special gaming state (ie, probable promotion promotion effect) that gives (improves) an effect (indication) that a high probability state will be in the middle of the round game after the end of the round game. Is a special game state that is apparently the same as a normal special game state in which a high probability state does not occur after the end of the round game), and the frame accessory 95 starts from a state that does not overlap the screen at the start of the probable promotion effect. It is comprised so that it may convert into the state which overlaps. In other words, when a promoted special game state occurs, the occurrence of a high-probability state is notified to the player by converting the frame accessory 95 from a state that does not overlap the screen to a state that overlaps the screen during the round game (suggestion). Make it possible.
Then, the flow path switching member 42c is in the middle of the special game state in which the high probability state is not generated after the round game is completed and in the special special game state in which the probability change promotion effect is executed in the middle of the round game. It is comprised so that it may switch to 2 switching state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, a probable big hit with a promotion effect, that is, a promotion that executes a probability change promotion effect that generates a high probability state after the end of the round game and notifies that in the middle of the round game. In the case of the special gaming state, the flow path switching member 42c is switched from the first switching state (see FIG. 139 (a)) to the second switching state (see FIG. 139 (b)) at the start of the special gaming state. The frame accessory 95 starts to move at the start of the probable promotion effect, converts from a state that does not overlap the screen to a state that overlaps the screen, and then overlaps the screen before the flow path switching member 42c returns to the first switching state. To return to the state where it does not overlap the screen. Then, the flow path switching member 42c returns from the second switching state to the first switching state at the end of the special gaming state. That is, as the probability change promotion effect, the flow path switching member 42c is switched to the second switching state so that the game ball passes through the second downstream path 42b before the frame accessory 95 is converted to a state overlapping the screen. As a result, the right-handed game ball (in this embodiment, when a special game state occurs, the right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed player) is converted into a state in which the state is overlapped with the screen. It is prevented that it becomes difficult to visually recognize by the accessory 95. Further, as shown in FIG. 139, since the second downstream path 42b is a bypass and is bent more than the first downstream path 42a, when the game ball flows down the second downstream path 42b, there is a momentum to flow down. Weakened. Therefore, it takes more time to flow down the second flow path 42b than when flowing down the first flow path 42a, and it is possible to earn time for performing the probable promotion effect as long as possible.

In addition, in the case of the probability variation special hit state without promotion effect, that is, the probability variation special game state in which a high probability state is generated after the completion and the fact is notified from the beginning of the round game, even if the special game state starts, the flow path The switching member 42c is not switched in the first switching state, and the frame accessory 95 is not moved while remaining on the screen. Since there is no possibility that the promotion effect is performed, there is no need to convert the flow path switching member 42c to the second switching state.
Further, in the case of a normal big hit, that is, a normal special gaming state that does not generate a high probability state after the end, the flow path switching member 42c is switched from the first switching state to the second switching state at the start of the special gaming state. The frame accessory 95 does not move while remaining on the screen. Then, the flow path switching member 42c returns from the second switching state to the first switching state at the end of the special gaming state. Thereby, the probability variation promotion effect is not actually executed, but the probability variation promotion effect is produced even when a special gaming state that does not cause a high probability state after the end occurs by switching the flow path switching member 42c to the second switching state. The player can have a sense of expectation for being executed.
In addition, the operation timing of the frame accessory 95, the switching timing of the flow path switching member 42c, and the execution timing of the promotion effect are not limited to the above-described timing, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Further, the frame accessory 95 may or may not have translucency.
When the frame accessory 95 has translucency, the frame accessory 95 can be decorated with light from the display device 41. Since the display device 41 is disposed behind the game ball rolling passage 42, the visibility of the game ball rolling passage 42 is inhibited from being disturbed by light from the display device 41.
When the frame accessory 95 has translucency, not only light from the display device 41 but also light from a light source (such as an LED) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). However, the frame accessory 95 may be configured to be decorated. In that case, from the viewpoint of suppressing the visibility of the game ball rolling passage 42 from being obstructed, it is preferable that the light source is disposed not behind the game ball rolling passage 42 but at the side or side. .

  Further, when the frame accessory 95 has translucency, if the translucency is high and the rear of the frame accessory 95 is visible, the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is in the first state and In any case of the second state, the game ball rolling in the game ball rolling passage 42 becomes visible. This applies to the case where the frame accessory 95 and the game ball rolling passage 42 always overlap in the front-rear direction and the case where they overlap in the front-rear direction depending on the state of the frame accessory 95.

FIG. 141 shows a first modification of the frame accessory 95.
When the frame accessory 95 has translucency, the frame accessory 95 may incorporate a light source (LED or the like).
In this case, as shown in FIG. 141, light from the display device 41 or the like (indicated by an arrow with polka dots in FIG. 141) and light from a light source inside the frame accessory 95 (hatched hatching in FIG. 141). The frame accessory 95 can be decorated with both of them.
Note that the position of the game ball rolling passage 42 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 141, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Further, the game ball rolling passage 42 may be bifurcated like the game ball rolling passage 42 (see FIG. 138) of the third modification.

FIG. 142 shows a second modification of the frame accessory 95.
When the frame accessory 95 has translucency and has a built-in light source, as shown in FIG. 142, the portion of the frame accessory 95 that faces the cover glass 14 has translucency ( A sheet 95a capable of changing (light transmittance) may be attached.
In this case, for example, when the right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike, the translucency of the sheet 95a is set so that the rear of the frame accessory 95 can be visually recognized (for example, transparent). Change the translucency of the sheet 95a so that the back of the frame accessory 95 cannot be visually recognized (for example, it becomes opaque) when the left strike is more advantageous to the player than the right strike. Can be made.

As a result, when the right strike is more advantageous to the player, the seat 95a becomes transparent. Therefore, even if the game ball rolling passage 42 is disposed behind the frame accessory 95, the seat 95a is hit to the right and played. A game ball passing through the ball rolling passage 42 can be seen through the frame accessory 95, and further, a game flowing down the light from the light source in the frame accessory 95 and the rear of the frame accessory 95. It is possible to perform a light effect in combination with a sphere.
Further, when left-handed is more advantageous for the player, it is not necessary to visually recognize the game ball rolling passage 42. Therefore, the sheet 95a is made opaque and the light effect using the light source in the frame accessory 95 is emphasized. It becomes possible.
That is, by changing the translucency of the sheet 95a attached to the frame accessory 95 of the modified example 2, the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is in either the first state or the second state. The game ball rolling in the game ball rolling passage 42 becomes visible.

The sheet 95a can be arbitrarily selected as appropriate. For example, the sheet 95a may be a sheet whose translucency changes according to the light intensity, such as a magic mirror, or may be translucent by energization, such as a liquid crystal shutter. The sheet may change.
Further, the position of the game ball rolling passage 42 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 142, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. As shown in FIG. 142, when the game ball rolling passage 42 is disposed behind the frame accessory 95, even if the sheet 95a becomes opaque, the game ball can be seen by looking into the rear of the frame accessory 95. It is preferable that the rolling passage 42 be configured to be visible. Further, the game ball rolling passage 42 may be bifurcated like the game ball rolling passage 42 (see FIG. 138) of the third modification.

FIGS. 143 to 145 show a modification of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment may further include a rendering accessory 96 behind the center case 40.
The production role 96 has a shape related to the shape of the frame role 95. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the frame accessory 95 has a horse shape, and the director role 96 has a hand shape of a person having carrots, which is a favorite food of horses.

As shown in FIG. 145, for example, the production role 96 is disposed in the space between the game board 30 and the display device 41 and does not overlap the display screen of the display device 41 (ie, the game). An opening for exposing the display screen of the display device 41 formed on the game board 30 (center case 40). In a visually recognizable state appearing inside).
As a result, a larger accessory can be formed by the frame accessory 95 and the production accessory 96 via the cover glass 14. As the size of the frame accessory 95 increases, the frame accessory 95 obstructs the opening and closing of the glass frame 15, and the glass frame 15 opens and closes due to factors such as the frame accessory 95 being easily damaged when the glass frame 15 is opened and closed. Although it becomes difficult, it becomes possible to make it easy to open and close the glass frame 15 and to provide a larger accessory by combining the frame accessory 95 and the production accessory 96.

FIG. 146 shows a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation timings of the frame accessory 95 and the rendering accessory 96 in the present embodiment.
In the case of the present embodiment, when the production actor 96 moves and becomes visible, the frame actor 95 is converted from a state (see FIG. 143) that does not overlap the screen to a state (see FIG. 144) that overlaps the screen. Has been.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, the production actor 96 is in a predetermined state when the firing position designation signal is OFF, that is, when the left strike is more advantageous to the player than the right strike. At the timing, the state is changed from an invisible state to a visible state.
When the stage object 96 becomes visible, the frame object 95 is converted from a state where it does not overlap the screen to a state where it overlaps the screen, and then the stage object 96 returns from a state where it can be visually recognized to an invisible state. The frame accessory 95 returns from the state where it overlaps the screen to the state where it does not overlap the screen.

  When the launch position designation signal is OFF, when a game ball wins the normal start gate 34 and the gate switch (gate sensor) 34a is turned ON, the gaming machine 10 determines that the player has made a right-handed strike and a right-handed warning. (Display or voice output prompting to return to left-handed) is executed (ON), and a frame accessory restriction flag that restricts the frame accessory 95 from overlapping the screen is set (ON). If the frame accessory 95 overlaps the screen while being right-handed, the game ball may be difficult to see. Therefore, if it is detected that the right hand is hit, the frame accessory 95 overlaps the screen. Regulate the state. However, since the effect agent 96 is arranged behind the game ball rolling passage 42, the operation of the effect agent 96 is not restricted even when it is detected that the player has hit right. Therefore, if the launch position designation signal is OFF, the rendering agent 96 converts the invisible state to the visible state at a predetermined timing.

That is, when the launch position designation signal is OFF, the effect agent 96 converts from the invisible state to the visible state at a predetermined timing. At this time, if the frame accessory restriction flag is OFF, the frame accessory 95 changes from a state that does not overlap the screen to a state that overlaps the screen when the stage accessory 96 becomes visible, If the flag is ON, even if the production actor 96 becomes visible, it does not operate in a state where it does not overlap the screen.
Also, if a game ball is hit right while the right-hand warning is being executed, the game ball may flow down the game ball rolling passage 42 after the right-hand warning is finished. In this embodiment, the ON period of the frame accessory restriction flag is set to be longer than the ON period of the right-handed warning.

In addition, when the frame accessory restriction flag is turned on during the conversion from the state where the frame object 95 does not overlap the screen to the state where it overlaps the screen, after the conversion from the state where it does not overlap the screen to the state where it overlaps the screen Can be configured to return to a state that does not overlap the screen, or can be configured to return to a state that does not overlap the screen even during conversion from a state that does not overlap the screen to a state that overlaps the screen It is.
Further, the position of the game ball rolling passage 42 is not limited to the positions shown in FIGS. 143 to 145 and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Further, the game ball rolling passage 42 may be bifurcated like the game ball rolling passage 42 (see FIG. 138) of the third modification.
Further, the operation timing of the frame accessory 95 and the operation timing of the production accessory 96 are not limited to the timing described above, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming board 30 that forms a gaming area 32 where gaming balls flow down, a gaming machine frame (front frame 12) that houses the gaming board 30, and a gaming area. In a gaming machine constituted by a transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) that holds a transparent member (cover glass 14) that covers 32 from the front, a decorative feature is provided on the front side of the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15). The decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is arranged such that at least a part of the decorative accessory is operable in front of the transparent member (cover glass 14). Yes.

  Therefore, since the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) can be effectively arranged, it is possible to increase the size of the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) and improve the interest of the game.

  The game area 32 is provided with a game ball rolling passage 42 through which a game ball can roll, and the game ball rolling passage 42 is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95). Thus, it is possible to configure such that the game ball rolling in the game ball rolling passage 42 is visible.

  By configuring in this way, even if a decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) protrudes to the game area 32 side, the visibility of the game ball is not hindered, so that the interest of the game is not impaired.

  In addition, the game area 32 includes a game ball rolling passage 42 through which a game ball can roll, and the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) is in the first state (in the present embodiment, the state does not overlap the screen). And the second state (in the case of the present embodiment, the state overlapping the screen), and the game ball rolling passage 42 has a decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) in the first state and the second state. In any case, it is possible to configure the gaming ball rolling in the gaming ball rolling passage 42 so as to be visible.

  With this configuration, even if a decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) protrudes to the game area 32 side, the visibility of the game ball is not hindered, so that the interest of the game is not impaired.

  The decorative accessory (frame accessory 95) can also be configured to have translucency.

  With this configuration, light from the back of the decorative accessory (frame accessory 95), that is, light from the game area 32 can be transmitted, so that a synergistic effect can be expected.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game machine frame)
14 Cover glass (transparent member)
15 Glass frame (transparent member holding frame)
30 game board 32 game area 41 display device (variable display device)
42 game ball rolling passage 51 special figure 1 display (variation display device)
52 Special figure 2 display (variation display device)
80 Voice recognition unit (voice recognition means)
90b Operation body (operation means)
90a Tactile sensor (operation detection means)
95 Frames (decoratives)
100 Game control device (control means)
300 Production control device (control means)

Claims (4)

Control means for executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the result of the game is a predetermined result,
A voice recognition means capable of recognizing the content of the voice uttered by the player and generating voice recognition information including content information related to the recognized content;
The control means includes
A game machine capable of executing a response effect corresponding to the content information based on the voice recognition information. The control means includes
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the response effect is executed based on a gaming state of the gaming machine and the voice recognition information. The voice recognition means
Recognizing the language type of the voice uttered by the player, it is possible to generate information including language type information related to the recognized language type as the voice recognition information,
The control means includes
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an effect corresponding to content information and language type information included in the voice recognition information is executed as the response effect. The control means includes
If the voice recognition means could not recognize the language type of the voice, the response effect was generated before the voice recognition information and the content information related to the voice content included in the voice recognition information. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein an effect corresponding to the language type information included in the voice recognition information is executed.

Images